1. business and industrial
2. construction

PROJECT MANUAL
AND SPECIFICATIONS
CSL PLASMA NEW CENTER
Gilbert, AZ
April 9, 2014
OWNER
CSL PLASMA
900 BROKEN SOUND PARKWAY, SUITE 400
BOCA RATON, FL 33487
ARCHITECT
Novus Architects, Inc.
900 Johnnie Dodds Blvd.
SUITE 200
PO Box 1005
MOUNT PLEASANT, SC 29464
843-849-7407
Division
Section Title
Pages
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING DOCUMENTS GROUP
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
003300 ......... INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS.................................................................................
007500 ......... GENERAL CONDITIONS.............................................................................................................
008100 ......... SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS ................................................................................................
1
1
8
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
General Requirements Subgroup
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
011000 ......... SUMMARY ...................................................................................................................................
012100 ......... ALLOWANCES.............................................................................................................................
012300 ......... ALTERNATES ..............................................................................................................................
012600 ......... CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES............................................................................
012700 ......... UNIT PRICES ...............................................................................................................................
012900 ......... PAYMENT PROCEDURES..........................................................................................................
013100 ......... PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION ....................................................................
013200 ......... CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION ..................................................................
013300 ......... SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES .......................................................................................................
014000 ......... QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................................
015000 ......... TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS.............................................................................
016000 ......... PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS......................................................................................................
017000 ......... EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS...................................................................................................
017329 ......... CUTTING AND PATCHING .........................................................................................................
017700 ......... CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES .......................................................................................................
3
2
1
2
1
4
4
4
7
6
5
4
5
3
6
Facility Construction Subgroup
DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS
024119 ......... SELECTIVE DEMOLITION ..........................................................................................................
4
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE
035416 ......... HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT..................................................................................
4
DIVISION 05 - METALS
055000 ......... METAL FABRICATIONS ..............................................................................................................
055213 ......... PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS ........................................................................................................
4
5
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
061000 ......... ROUGH CARPENTRY .................................................................................................................
064023 ......... INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK .............................................................................
066400 ......... PLASTIC PANELING ...................................................................................................................
3
7
2
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
0-1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
072100 ......... THERMAL INSULATION..............................................................................................................
075423 ......... THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING...................................................................
076200 ......... SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM .......................................................................................
2
6
7
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS
081113 ......... HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES ..................................................................................
081416 ......... FLUSH WOOD DOORS ...............................................................................................................
084113 ......... ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS......................................................
087100 ......... DOOR HARDWARE.....................................................................................................................
088000 ......... GLAZING ......................................................................................................................................
088720 ......... ARCHITECTURAL WINDOW FILM .............................................................................................
6
5
9
8
9
3
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES
092216 ......... NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING .....................................................................................
092400 ......... CEMENT PLASTERING...............................................................................................................
092900 ......... GYPSUM BOARD ........................................................................................................................
095113 ......... ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS ................................................................................................
096513 ......... RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES.....................................................................................
096519 ......... RESILIENT TILE FLOORING.......................................................................................................
096710 ......... DECORATIVE RESINOUS FLOORING ......................................................................................
096813 ......... TILE CARPETING ........................................................................................................................
097700 ......... FIBER REINFORCED LAMINATE PANELS (FRL)......................................................................
099113 ......... EXTERIOR PAINTING .................................................................................................................
099123 ......... INTERIOR PAINTING ..................................................................................................................
4
7
4
4
5
4
4
4
3
4
5
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
102113 ......... TOILET COMPARTMENTS .........................................................................................................
102600 ......... WALL PROTECTION ...................................................................................................................
102800 ......... TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES .......................................................................
104413 ......... FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS ..............................................................................................
105113 ......... METAL LOCKERS .......................................................................................................................
3
4
2
4
5
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
113100 ......... RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES ......................................................................................................
3
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
133125 ......... PREFABRICATED METAL BUILDINGS (BIOHAZARD SHEDS) ................................................
2
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
0-2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 003300-INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS
EXISTING REPORTS AND SURVEYS
Asbestos Testing Report
Lead Based Paint Report
Roof Report
END OF SECTION 003300
INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
003300 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
ASBESTOS & LEAD-BASED PAINT SURVEY REPORT
PROPOSED CSL PLASMA
GILBERT TOWNE CENTER
711 NORTH GILBERT ROAD, SUITE 144
GILBERT, MARICOPA COUNTY, ARIZONA 84234
Prepared For:
Mr. Andrew Newbatt Smith
Construction Administration
Novus Architects
900 Johnnie Dodds Boulevard, Suite 200
Mt. Pleasant, South Carolina 29464
Prepared By:
Resource Environmental Consulting, Inc.
1431 Greenway Drive, Suite 800
Irving, Texas 75038
(972) 385-4535 Phone
(972) 385-7161 Facsimile
February 16, 2014
REC Project No.: 14113
ASBESTOS & LEAD-BASED PAINT SURVEY REPORT
CONDUCTED ON:
PROPOSED CSL PLASMA
GILBERT TOWNE CENTER
711 NORTH GILBERT ROAD, SUITE 144
GILBERT, MARICOPA COUNTY, ARIZONA 84234
CONDUCTED FOR:
MR. ANDREW NEWBATT SMITH
CONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATION
NOVUS ARCHITECTS
900 JOHNNIE DODDS BOULEVARD, SUITE 200
MT. PLEASANT, SOUTH CAROLINA 29464
PREPARED BY:
DYANA M. LEE
EPA ACCREDITED ASBESTOS INSPECTOR
RESOURCE ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTING, INC.
1431 GREENWAY DRIVE, SUITE 800
IRVING, TEXAS 75038
(972) 385-4535 PHONE
(972) 385-7161 FACSIMILE
FEBRUARY 16, 2014
REC PROJECT NO.: 14113
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1.0 INTRODUCTION.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.0 OBJECTIVES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.1
SCOPE OF WORK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2.2
LIMITATIONS OF STUDY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
3.0 BUILDING DESCRIPTION.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4.0 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4.1
ASBESTOS REGULATIONS.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
4.2
LEAD-BASED PAINT REGULATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
5.0 SAMPLE COLLECTION & TEST METHODS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
5.1
ASBESTOS SAMPLE COLLECTION & TEST METHODS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
5.2
LEAD-BASED PAINT TEST METHODS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
6.0 TEST RESULTS.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
6.1
ASBESTOS RESULTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
6.2
LEAD-BASED PAINT RESULTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
7.0 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
7.1
ASBESTOS CONCLUSIONS.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
7.2
LEAD-BASED PAINT CONCLUSIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
LIST OF APPENDICES
APPENDIX A
APPENDIX B
APPENDIX C
APPENDIX D
APPENDIX E
INSPECTOR CERTIFICATION
ASBESTOS LABORATORY REPORT
LEAD-BASED PAINT TEST REPORT
SAMPLE LOCATION DRAWING
PHOTOGRAPHS
ASBESTOS & LEAD-BASED PAINT SURVEY REPORT
PROPOSED CSL PLASMA
GILBERT TOWNE CENTER
711 NORTH GILBERT ROAD, SUITE 144
GILBERT, MARICOPA COUNTY, ARIZONA 84234
1.0 INTRODUCTION
On February 6, 2014, Resource Environmental Consulting, Inc. (REC) conducted an asbestos and lead-based
paint survey of the vacant commercial suite located at 711 North Gilbert Road, Suite 144, in Gilbert, Arizona.
Twenty-five (25) samples of suspected asbestos-containing materials were collected at the suites and
submitted to a National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP) accredited laboratory for
analysis. Fifteen (15) locations of lead-based paint were analyzed using an X-ray Fluorescence (XRF)
analyzer. The following sections discuss the sample collection procedures, laboratory analysis methods,
analytical test results, and recommendations for the identified asbestos-containing materials (ACM) and leadbased paint (LBP).
A copy of the asbestos consultant agency and inspector license is included in Appendix A.
2.0 OBJECTIVES
REC’s scope of work and limitations for conducting the asbestos and lead-based paint survey are discussed
in the following sections.
2.1 Scope of Work
The objective of the survey was to identify and test suspect materials at the site for asbestos and lead-based
paint prior to renovation activities. Destructive sampling techniques for collection of suspected materials in
inaccessible locations was not conducted due to the destructive nature of the testing. The scope of work was
conducted in accordance with applicable state and federal regulations at the time of the survey.
2.2 Limitations of Study
REC has endeavored to perform the survey of the site using generally accepted practices and in a manner
consistent with the level of care exercised by members of our profession currently practicing under similar
conditions. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties either expressed or implied.
The survey of the suite included a visual inspection and testing of all observed suspect materials. Regardless
of the thoroughness of our survey, it is possible that some materials were inaccessible at the time of the
survey. If any material is discovered during renovations activities that was inaccessible at the time of the
survey, that material should be tested before being disturbed.
This Asbestos & Lead-Based Paint Survey Report was prepared for Novus Architects and CSL Plasma and
is intended for their express purposes only. This report should not be relied upon or made use of by any
parties other than those mentioned herein. The findings of this report are representative of conditions
encountered at the site on the date of this evaluation and may not represent conditions at a later date.
Novus Architects
REC Project No.: 14113
February 16, 2014
Page 2
3.0 BUILDING DESCRIPTION
The subject commercial suite is located within the Gilbert Towne Center, next to Big Lots. The building is
concrete block construction and comprises 9,100 ft2 (approximately 63' x 144') The interior of the suite is
finished with sheetrock wallboard, carpet and vinyl tile flooring, and a suspended tile ceiling.
4.0 ENVIRONMENTAL REGULATIONS
4.1 Asbestos Regulations
The Arizona Department of Environmental Quality (ADEQ) enforces the EPA National Emission Standards
for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP) regulations in the state. Specifically, Maricopa County has
enforcement authority of the EPA NESHAP regulations in its jurisdictional boundaries.
The EPA National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants regulations (40 CFR Part 61, Subpart
M) apply to the owner or operator of a demolition or renovation activity and is applicable to all public
buildings and structures, including both interior and exterior building materials.
The Occupational Safety and Health Administration regulations (29 CFR 1926.1101) apply to all
construction work where an employee may be occupationally exposed to asbestos. These regulations are
applicable in any type of public building or structure.
4.2 Lead-Based Paint Regulations
The Environmental Protection Agency regulations (Title X) applies to target housing (pre-1978 constructed
housing) and child-occupied facilities (day cares, kindergartens, preschools) and do not apply to public
buildings not otherwise utilized for housing or child-occupied facilities.
The Occupational Safety and Health Administration regulations (29 CFR 1926.62) applies to all construction
work where an employee may be occupationally exposed to lead. These regulations are applicable in any type
of public building or structure.
5.0 SAMPLE COLLECTION & TEST METHODS
5.1 Asbestos Sample Collection & Test Methods
The survey was performed by Dyana M. Lee, an EPA-accredited Asbestos Inspector. The suite was surveyed
to determine the presence, location, and condition of visible and accessible ACM. The survey was conducted
in accordance to the Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response Act (AHERA) protocols as required by the EPA
NESHAP regulations.
Novus Architects
REC Project No.: 14113
February 16, 2014
Page 3
The number and location of samples collected was based on the type of material, the manner application, and
the homogeneity of the ACM (similarity of color, texture, and type). A discrete sample of each suspect ACM
was obtained and placed into an individual sample container. The sample location was noted on the field
survey form and assigned an individual laboratory identification number. This number was affixed to the
sample container as the sample was collected. The survey form was also used to note the material type and
general condition of the material.
The suspected ACM samples were analyzed for asbestos content by Steve Moody Micro Services, Inc. of
Farmers Branch, Texas, a NVLAP-accredited asbestos laboratory (No. 102056-0). The samples were
analyzed using Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM), in conjunction with dispersion staining techniques as
outlined in the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) Method (600/R-93/116). The bulk asbestos
laboratory analysis report provided the percentage of asbestos, asbestos type, and identification of other nonasbestos fibers and associated percentages.
A copy of the laboratory report and license is presented in Appendix B.
5.2 Lead-Based Paint Test Methods
The lead-based paint survey was conducted by Dyana M. Lee. The suite was surveyed to determine the
presence, location, and condition of visible and accessible LBP. The lead-based paint survey was conducted
using a portable Innov-X , X-ray fluorescence (XRF) analyzer. An XRF is a technique to identify when lead
is present in paint without damaging the painted surface. The XRF utilizes energy from a small radioactive
source in the XRF gun that excites the paint lead atoms which re-emit the energy as a characteristic and
quantifiable signal. The portable XRF device is also called a “spectrum analyzer”, which automatically
subtracts any re-emitted energy from the substrate of the paint so as to yield a more accurate result. The lead
content in each test location was viewed immediately and data logged in the device.
A copy of the test report is presented in Appendix C.
6.0 ANALYTICAL RESULTS
The following sections represent the analytical results for the asbestos and lead-based paint surveys. Refer
to Appendix D for a drawing depicting the test locations.
6.1 Asbestos Results
Bulk samples of materials that analytical test results indicate are greater than 1% asbestos are considered by
EPA NESHAP regulations to be ACM. The following table reflects a summary of the laboratory results for
each suspect asbestos-containing material tested at the site:
Novus Architects
REC Project No.: 14113
Homogeneous
February 16, 2014
Page 4
M aterial Description
Sample
Friable/
Asbestos Content
Non-Friable
Numbers
1,2,3
white concrete block wall texture
Non-Friable
None Detected-concrete
None Detected-paint/texture
4
tan exterior concrete wall texture
Non-Friable
None Detected-concrete
None Detected-paint/texture
5
2' x 4' suspended ceiling tile
6
4" black vinyl cove base & mastic
Friable
None Detected-acoustic tile
Non-Friable
None Detected-cove base
None Detected-cream mastic
7
yellow carpet glue
Non-Friable
None Detected-yellow mastic
8
1' x 1' white vinyl floor tile & mastic
Non-Friable
None Detected-floor tile
None Detected-yellow mastic
None Detected-leveling compound
9
HVAC duct insulation
Non-Friable
None Detected-thermal insulation
None Detected-paper/tar wrap
10,11,12,13,
14,15,16
tan sheetrock wallboard texture & joint
compound
Non-Friable
None Detected-drywall
None Detected-joint compound
None Detcted-texture
17,18,19
white sheetrock wallboard texture &
joint compound
Non-Friable
None Detected-drywall
None Detected-joint compound
None Detected-texture
20,21,22
tan vinyl floor tile & mastic
Non-Friable
None Detected-floor tile
None Detected-black mastic
23,24,25
gold concrete block wall texture
Non-Friable
None Detected-concrete
None Detected-paint/texture
Photographs of the building materials identified as asbestos-containing are included in Appendix E.
6.2 Lead-Based Paint Results
Painted surfaces that analytical test results indicate are greater than 1.0 mg/cm2 are defined by EPA
regulatory standards to be lead-based paint (LBP). The following table is a summary of the results for each
suspect lead-based paint tested at the site:
Novus Architects
REC Project No.: 14113
Test
Number
February 16, 2014
Page 5
Paint Description
Location
Lead Content
(mg/cm 2)
-
-
0
Standardization (field calibration)
1
tan on sheetrock wallboard
showroom
0
2
brown window frame
storefront entry
0
3
white concrete masonry block
front storage room
0
4
gold concrete masonry block
back storage room
0
5
brown door frame
store front entry
0
6
tan on metal column
showroom
7
gold on sheetrock wallboard
back storage room
0
8
white on sheetrock wallboard
front storage room
0
9
gold on sheetrock wallboard
back storage room
0
10
off-white on metal door & frame
back entry
0
11
black on metal door frame
entry at storage room
0
12
brown on wood soffit
exterior, front
0
13
white on wood door & frame
front storage room
0
14
brown on columns
exterior, front
0
15
tan on concrete walls
exterior, back
0.11
0.06
7.0 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS
On February 6, 2014, REC conducted an asbestos and lead-based paint survey of the vacant commercial suite
located at 711 North Gilbert Road, Suite 144, in Gilbert, Arizona. The following are the conclusions and
recommendations based on the test results of the surveys.
7.1 Asbestos Conclusions & Recommendations
No asbestos-containing materials were identified in the suite, therefore no further action is required prior to
renovations.
7.2 Lead-Based Paint Conclusions & Recommendations
No lead-based paint was identified in the suite, therefore no further action is required prior to renovations.
APPENDIX A
INSPECTOR CERTIFICATION
In cooperation with
AMARILLO COLLEGE
Awards this Certificate to
DYANAM.LEE
Cert # IR-8494
DL# TX 12047762
For the completion of the
4-HOUR TRAINING COURSE AND IS REACCREDITED
AS BUILDING INSPECTOR FOR ASBESTOS
In accordance with the EPA Model Accreditation Plan, 40 CFR 763 App. C to Subpart E,
Interim Final Rule, under TSCA Title II.
--c~
January 22. 2014
Date of Class
. r)~--·-
January 22. 2015
Expiration Date
316 Pennsylvania St.
So. Houston, Texas 77587
January 22. 2014
Date of Examination
713-921-8921
www.proenvtraining.com
C.E.U. Awarded:
.4 Credits
President, Fredy Polanco, M.S.
f-jZ
Instructor, Fredy Polanco, M.S.
APPENDIX B
ASBESTOS LABORATORY REPORT
PLM Summary Report
Steve Moody Micro Services, LLC
NVLAP Lab Code 102056-0
2051 Valley View Lane
TDSHS License No. 30-0084
Farmers Branch, TX 75234 Phone: (972) 241-8460
Client :
Resource Environmental Consulting, Inc.
Lab Job No. : 14B-01584
Project :
Project # :
711 North Gilbert Road, Suite 114, Gilbert, Arizona
14113
Sample Date : 02/06/2014
Report Date : 02/11/2014
Identification :
Asbestos, Bulk Sample Analysis
Test Method :
Polarized Light Microscopy / Dispersion Staining (PLM/DS)
EPA Method 600 / R-93 / 116
Page 1 of 3
On 2/7/2014, twenty five (25) bulk material samples were submitted by Dyana Lee of Resource Environmental Consulting, Inc. for asbestos analysis by
PLM/DS. The PLM Detail Report is attached; additional information may be found therein. The results are summarized below:
Sample Number
Client Sample Description / Location
Asbestos Content
1
Concrete Block Wall Texture (White), Front Storage Room
None Detected - Concrete
None Detected - Paint / Texture
2
Concrete Block Wall Texture (White), Front Storage Room
None Detected - Concrete
None Detected - Paint / Texture
3
Concrete Block Wall Texture (White), Front Storage Room
None Detected - Concrete
None Detected - Paint / Texture
4
Concrete Wall Texture (Tan), Exterior
None Detected - Concrete
None Detected - Paint / Texture
5
2' x 4' Suspended Ceiling Tile, Throughout
None Detected - Acoustic Tile
6
4" Vinyl Cove Base (Black) and Mastic, Throughout
None Detected - Cove Base
None Detected - Cream Mastic
7
Carpet Glue (Yellow), Show Room
None Detected - Yellow Mastic
8
1' x 1' Vinyl Floor Tile (White) and Mastic, Entry
None Detected - Floor Tile
None Detected - Yellow Mastic
None Detected - Leveling Compound
9
HVAC Duct Insulation, above Ceiling
None Detected - Thermal Insulation
None Detected - Paper/Tar Wrap
10
Sheetrock Wallboard Texture (Tan) and Joint Compound,
Show Room
None Detected - Drywall Material
None Detected - Joint Compound
None Detected - Texture
11
Sheetrock Wallboard Texture (Tan) and Joint Compound,
Show Room
None Detected - Joint Compound
None Detected - Texture
12
Sheetrock Wallboard Texture (Tan) and Joint Compound,
Show Room
None Detected - Drywall Material
None Detected - Texture / Joint Cmpd
13
Sheetrock Wallboard Texture (Tan) and Joint Compound,
Show Room
None Detected - Drywall Material
None Detected - Texture / Joint Cmpd
14
Sheetrock Wallboard Texture (Tan) and Joint Compound,
Show Room
None Detected - Drywall Material
None Detected - Texture / Joint Cmpd
PLM Summary Report
Steve Moody Micro Services, LLC
NVLAP Lab Code 102056-0
2051 Valley View Lane
TDSHS License No. 30-0084
Farmers Branch, TX 75234 Phone: (972) 241-8460
Client :
Resource Environmental Consulting, Inc.
Lab Job No. : 14B-01584
Project :
Project # :
711 North Gilbert Road, Suite 114, Gilbert, Arizona
14113
Sample Date : 02/06/2014
Report Date : 02/11/2014
Identification :
Asbestos, Bulk Sample Analysis
Test Method :
Polarized Light Microscopy / Dispersion Staining (PLM/DS)
EPA Method 600 / R-93 / 116
Page 2 of 3
On 2/7/2014, twenty five (25) bulk material samples were submitted by Dyana Lee of Resource Environmental Consulting, Inc. for asbestos analysis by
PLM/DS. The PLM Detail Report is attached; additional information may be found therein. The results are summarized below:
Sample Number
Client Sample Description / Location
Asbestos Content
15
Sheetrock Wallboard Texture (Tan) and Joint Compound,
Show Room
None Detected - Drywall Material
None Detected - Joint Compound
None Detected - Texture
16
Sheetrock Wallboard Texture (Tan) and Joint Compound,
Show Room
None Detected - Drywall Material
None Detected - Texture / Joint Cmpd
17
Sheetrock Wallboard Texture (White) and Joint Compound
None Detected - Drywall Material
None Detected - Texture / Joint Cmpd
18
Sheetrock Wallboard Texture (White) and Joint Compound
None Detected - Drywall Material
None Detected - Joint Compound
None Detected - Texture
19
Sheetrock Wallboard Texture (White) and Joint Compound
None Detected - Drywall Material
None Detected - Texture / Joint Cmpd
20
1' x 1' Vinyl Floor Tile (Tan) and Mastic (Black), Storage
Rooms
None Detected - Floor Tile
None Detected - Black Mastic
21
1' x 1' Vinyl Floor Tile (Tan) and Mastic (Black), Storage
Rooms
None Detected - Floor Tile
None Detected - Black Mastic
22
1' x 1' Vinyl Floor Tile (Tan) and Mastic (Black), Storage
Rooms
None Detected - Floor Tile
None Detected - Black Mastic
23
Concrete Block Wall Texture (Gold), Back Storage Room
None Detected - Concrete
None Detected - Paint / Texture
24
Concrete Block Wall Texture (Gold), Back Storage Room
None Detected - Concrete
None Detected - Paint / Texture
25
Concrete Block Wall Texture (Gold), Back Storage Room
None Detected - Concrete
None Detected - Paint / Texture
PLM Summary Report
Steve Moody Micro Services, LLC
NVLAP Lab Code 102056-0
2051 Valley View Lane
TDSHS License No. 30-0084
Farmers Branch, TX 75234 Phone: (972) 241-8460
Client :
Resource Environmental Consulting, Inc.
Lab Job No. : 14B-01584
Project :
Project # :
711 North Gilbert Road, Suite 114, Gilbert, Arizona
14113
Sample Date : 02/06/2014
Report Date : 02/11/2014
Identification :
Asbestos, Bulk Sample Analysis
Test Method :
Polarized Light Microscopy / Dispersion Staining (PLM/DS)
EPA Method 600 / R-93 / 116
Page 3 of 3
On 2/7/2014, twenty five (25) bulk material samples were submitted by Dyana Lee of Resource Environmental Consulting, Inc. for asbestos analysis by
PLM/DS. The PLM Detail Report is attached; additional information may be found therein. The results are summarized below:
Sample Number
Client Sample Description / Location
Asbestos Content
These samples were analyzed by layers. Quantification, unless otherwise noted, is performed by calibrated visual
estimate. The test report shall not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval of the laboratory. The results
relate only to the items tested. These test results do not imply endorsement by NVLAP or any agency of the U.S.
Government. Accredited by the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Bulk Asbestos Fiber Analysis
under Lab Code 102056-0.
Analyst(s): Debra O'Sullivan
Lab Manager : Heather Lopez
Approved Signatory :
Lab Director : Bruce Crabb
Approved Signatory :
Thank you for choosing Steve Moody Micro Services
APPENDIX C
LEAD-BASED PAINT TEST REPORT
LEAD-BASED PAINT TESTING REPORT
PROPOSED CSL PLASMA
711 NORTH GILBERT ROAD, SUITE 144
GILBERT, ARIZONA 85234
Test Number
Paint Description
0
Standardization
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
tan on sheetrock wallboard
brown window frame
white concrete masonry block
gold concrete masonry block
brown door frame
tan on metal column
gold on sheetrock wallboard
white on sheetrock wallboard
gold on sheetrock wallboard
off-white on metal door & frame
black on metal door frame
brown on wood soffit
white on wood door & frame
brown on columns
tan on concrete walls
Location
Lead Result
(mg/cm2)
showroom
storefront entry
front storage room
back storage room
store front entry
showroom
back storage room
front storage room
back storage room
back entry
entry at storage room
exterior, front
front storage room
exterior, front
exterior, back
0
0
0
0
0
0.06
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.11
1
APPENDIX D
SAMPLE LOCATION DRAWING
A4
L15
L10
Asbestos &
Lead-Based
Paint Survey
Report
A23
L4
A24
A25
A9
Appendix D:
Sample
Locations
Drawing
A20
A16
L7
A15
L9
L11
A14
A5
A21
A22
A12
A7
A13
A6
L6
A11
L1
A18
A1
L3
L8
A19
A17
L13
A2
A8
L5 L2
A10
A3
L12
L14
APPENDIX E
PHOTOGRAPHS
ASBESTOS & LEAD-BASED PAINT SURVEY REPORT
Proposed CSL Plasma
711 N. Gilbert Road, Suite 144
Gilbert, Arizona 85234
Photo 1:
View of exterior (front entry) of suite.
Photo 2:
View of exterior (back) of suite.
REC Project No.:
14113
Client:
Novus Architects
Prepared By:
Dyana M. Lee
ASBESTOS & LEAD-BASED PAINT SURVEY REPORT
Proposed CSL Plasma
711 N. Gilbert Road, Suite 144
Gilbert, Arizona 85234
Photo 3:
View of interior show room area of suite.
Photo 4:
View of front (NWC) storage room.
REC Project No.:
14113
Client:
Novus Architects
Prepared By:
Dyana M. Lee
ASBESTOS & LEAD-BASED PAINT SURVEY REPORT
Proposed CSL Plasma
711 N. Gilbert Road, Suite 144
Gilbert, Arizona 85234
Photo 5:
View of back (east) storage room.
Photo 6:
View of restrooms (NEC) in suite.
REC Project No.:
14113
Client:
Novus Architects
Prepared By:
Dyana M. Lee
SECTION 007500 - GENERAL CONDITIONS
The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Documents A201, 2007 Edition, is hereby
incorporated as a part of the construction documents.
END OF SECTION 007500
GENERAL CONDITIONS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
007500 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 008100 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General Conditions of the Contract for
Construction" AIA Document A201, Fifteenth Edition, dated 2007. Where any article of the General
Conditions is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provisions of that article, paragraph,
subparagraph or clause remain in effect.
ARTICLE 1 - CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
1.1
Basic Definitions - Add the following Subparagraphs 1.1.8, and 1.1.9 to paragraph 1.1:
1.1.9
Where the words "equal to", "approved by" or other synonymous terms are used, it is
expressly understood that they shall mean that the approval of any such submission is
vested in the Architect, whose decision shall be final and binding upon all concerned. All
submissions are subject to such approval.
1.1.10 The term "provide" is intended to indicate "furnish, install and, if applicable, put into
operation" unless otherwise stated.
1.2
Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents - Add the following paragraph:
1.2.4
Sections of Division 1, General Requirements, govern the execution of all sections of the
Specifications.
ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR
3.4
Labor and Materials - Add the following Subparagraphs 3.4.4 through 3.4.8 to paragraph 3.4:
3.4.4
After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect may consider
a formal request for substitution of products in place of those specified only under
the conditions set forth in the General Requirements of Division 1 Specifications.
3.4.5
By making requests for substitutions based on Clause 3.4.3 above, the Contracts:
3.4.6
1.
Represents that he has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and
determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified.
2.
Certifies that the costs data presented is complete and includes all related costs
under this Contract but exclude costs under separate contract, and excludes the
Architect's redesign costs; and waives all claims for additional costs related to the
substitution which subsequently become apparent.
3.
Will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as
many be required for the work to be complete in all respects.
Not later than fifteen (15) days from the Contract date, the Contractor shall provide a list
showing the name of the manufacturer proposed to be used for each of the products or
components identified in the Specifications and, where applicable, the name of the installing
Subcontractor. Where required on the Bid form, names of subcontractors shall be included
on the bid form at time of bid.
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS
008100 - 1
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
4/9/14
2001-1112.92
Novus Architects, Inc.
3.7
3.4.7
The Architect will promptly reply in writing to the Contractor stating whether the Owner or the
Architect after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposal. If adequate
data on any proposed manufacturer of installer is not available, the Architect may state that
action will be deferred until the Contractor provides further data. Failure of the Owner or
Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. Failure to
object to a manufacturer shall not constitute a waiver of any of the requirements of the
Contract Documents, and all products furnished by the listed manufacturer must conform to
such requirements.
3.4.8
Plans and Specifications for this project show specific architectural, mechanical and
electrical entities, devices and diagrams of some items. The mention of acceptable
manufactures does not necessarily imply that their particular "standard" product is totally
adaptable to details or conditions shown. Therefore, the cost of modifications, deviations,
extensions or adjustments required for manufacturer's product must be included in the
Contractor's bid.
Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws:
Add the following Clause 3.7.1.1 to paragraph 3.7.1:
3.7.1.1
All other permits, tap charges, capacity charges, meters, inspections, and fees shall
be paid for by the Sub-contractor installing that portion of the work.
ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK
7.2
Change Orders
Add the following subparagraphs 7.2.2 and 7.2.7 to paragraph 7.2:
7.2.2
Change Order Procedure:
7.2.2.1
When job conditions require changes in the work, the Architect shall
prepare a Bulletin detailing the proposed changes and shall furnish copies
to the General Contractor.
7.2.2.2
The Contractor solicits proposals from his Subcontractors and material
suppliers and prepares a line item estimate proposal. the proposals from
Subcontractors to the Prime Contractor should also show line item
description with quantities, unit labor and material costs. The total labor
costs should be shown at the base rate to which total fringe costs and
markups should be added. The Subcontractor markup should conform to
the guidelines described in paragraph 7.2.4. Copies of such subcontract
and material supplier proposals should be include in the Prime Contractor's
submission to the Architect. Lump sum amounts will be rejected.
7.2.2.3
All proposals for change orders shall be made out by the Contractor in the
number requested and submitted to the architect with 14 days after receipt
of proposal request. The Contractor and Subcontractor shall furnish an
itemized detailed breakdown of the quantities and costs used in computing
the value of any change.
7.2.2.4
All costs associated with preparation and submission of requested
proposals to be included in overhead and profit.
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
008100 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
7.2.3
7.3
When the methods set forth in Clause 7.3.3.1 is used, the Contractor agrees to
charge and accept payment for his overhead and profit in the following percentages
of the cost of Work.
7.2.3.1
Fifteen percent (15%) for work by the Contractor not involving
Subcontractors.
7.2.3.2
Five percent (5%) for work by Subcontractors.
7.2.3.3
Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors:
7.2.3.3.1
Fifteen percent (15%) for work by the Subcontractor not involving Subsubcontractors.
7.2.3.3.2
Five percent (5%) for work by Sub-contractors.
7.2.4
When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved
in any one change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the
basis of the net increase, if any, with respect to that change.
7.2.5
In the event any one change results in a net credit or deduction, no overhead and
profit percentage of the said net will be credited to the Owner by the Contractor or
Subcontractors.
7.2.6
Overhead and Profit includes cost of supervision, (job and office), bond,
telephone, copying, secretaries, office, power, light tools, light scaffolding, and
other general expenses.
7.2.7
The Architect and Owner reserve the right to audit the Contractor's records insofar
as the "Line Item Cost" before commitments are made.
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES
7.3.7
In the first sentence, delete the words, "reasonable allowance for overhead and
profit" and substitute, "an allowance for overhead for overhead and profit in
accordance with paragraph 7.2.3.
ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION
9.2
Schedule of Values -- Add the following clause:
9.2.1
Submit schedule of values to Architect within fifteen (15) working days prior to first
request for payment.
9.3
Applications for Payment -- Add the following Clauses: 9.3.1.3 and 9.3.1.4 to 9.3.1:
9.3.1.3
Until the Work is 100% complete, the Owner will pay 90% of the amount due the
Contractor on account of progress payments.
9.3.1.4
Materials suitable to be stored off-site to be paid at 75% of the invoiced value
providing the conditions of Clause 9.3.2.1 are met.
Add the following Clauses 9.3.2.1 and 9.3.2.2 to paragraph 9.3.2:
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
008100 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
9.3.2.1
9.3.2.2
If advance approval is obtained for payment for off-site stored materials, the
Contractor must furnish the Owner the following:
9.3.2.1.1
A list of the materials consigned to the project (which shall be
clearly identified), giving the place of storage, together with
copies of invoices and reasons why materials cannot be
delivered to the site.
9.3.2.1.2
Certification that all items have been tagged for delivery to the
project and that they will not be used for any other purpose.
9.3.2.1.3
A letter from the Bonding Company indicating agreement to the
arrangements and that payment to the Contractor shall not relieve
either party of their responsibility to complete the facility.
9.3.2.1.4
Evidence of adequate insurance covering the material in storage.
9.3.2.1.5
Evidence that representatives of the Architect and/or Owner have
visited the Contractor's place of storage and checked all items on
the Contractor's Certificate. They shall certify, insofar as possible,
that the items are in agreement with specifications and approve
their incorporation into the project.
9.3.2.1.6
Any costs incurred by the Architect and/or Owner to inspect
material in off-site storage shall be paid by the Contractor.
The balance of such invoiced value shall be paid when such material is incorporated
into and becomes a part of such building, construction, addition, improvement,
alteration, or installation. When an estimate is allowed on account of material
delivered on the site the work or in the vicinity thereof or under the possession and
control of the Contractor, but not yet incorporated therein, such material shall
become the property of the Owner, but if such material is stolen, destroyed, or
damaged by casualty before being used, the Contractor will be required to replace it
at his own expense.
ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
10.2
Safety of Persons and Property -- Add the following:
10.2.2.1
Contractor to advise the local utility location company at least 48 hours prior
to beginning excavation or underground work of any kind.
10.2.4.1
Where use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials, equipment
or methods are necessary, the Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable
notice and provide all safety measures.
ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE
11.1
Contractor's Liability Insurance.
Add the following Clauses 11.1.1.9 and 11.1.1.10 to paragraph 11.1.1.:
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
008100 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
11.1.1.9
Liability insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a
comprehensive basis including:
a. Premises Operations (including X, C and U coverages as applicable).
b. Independent Contractor's Protective.
c. Products and Completed Operations.
d. Personal Injury Liability with Employment Exclusion Deleted.
e. Contractual, including specified provision for Contractor's obligation
under paragraph 3.18.
f. Owned, non-owned and hired motor vehicles.
g. Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operations.
11.1.1.10
If the General Liability coverages are provided by a Commercial General
Contractor termination of coverage shall be no earlier than the termination
date of coverages required to be maintained after final payment, certified in
accordance with subparagraph 9.10.1. Liability Policy on a claim-made
basis, the policy date or Retroactive Date shall predate the Contract; the
termination date of the policy or applicable extended reporting
Add the following Clause 11.1.2.1 to paragraph 11.1.2:
11.1.2.1
The insurance required by subparagraph 11.1.1. shall be written for not less
than the following limits or greater if required by law:
11.1.2.1.1
Workers Compensation:
a.
b.
Statutory
Employer's Liability: $ 500,000 per accident
11.1.2.1.2
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Comprehensive General Liability (including Premises-Operation; Independent
Contractors' Protective; Products and Completed
Operations; Broad Form Property Damage):
Bodily Injury:
$ 500,000 Each Occurrence
$1,000,000 Annual Aggregate
Property Damage:
$ 500,000 Each Occurrence
$1,000,000 Annual Aggregate
Products and Completed Operations to be maintained for two (2) years after final
payment.
Property Damage Liability insurance shall provide X, C, or coverage as applicable.
Broad Form Property Damage Coverage shall include Completed Operations.
11.1.2.1.3
Contractual Liability:
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
008100 - 5
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
a.
b.
Bodily Injury:
$ 500,000 Each Occurrence
$1,000,000 Annual Aggregate
Property Damage:
$ 500,000 Each Occurrence
$1,000,000 Annual Aggregate
11.1.2.1.4
a.
b.
$1,000,000 Annual Aggregate
11.1.2.1.5
a.
b.
b.
If the General Liability coverage is provided by a Commercial Liability
policy, the:
General Aggregate shall not be less than $1,000,000 and it shall apply, in total, to
this project only.
Medical Expense Limit to be not less than $1,000,000 on any one person.
11.1.2.1.7
a.
Business Automobile Liability (including owned, non-owned and hired
vehicles):
Bodily Injury:
$ 500,000 Each Person
$1,000,000 Each Occurrence
Property Damage:
$ 500,000 Each Occurrence
$1,000,000 Annual Aggregate
11.1.1.1.6
a.
Personal injury with Employment Exclusion Deleted:
Umbrella Excess Liability:
$1,000,000 over primary insurance.
11.1.2.1.8
Aircraft and/or Watercraft Liability (owner and non-owned) when
applicable: Owner to approve limits proposed by Contractor.
11.1.2.1.9
Claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable
to the Contractor's obligations under paragraph 3.18.
Add the following sentence to the end of subparagraph 11.1.3:
If this insurance is written on the Comprehensive General Liability policy form, the certificate shall be AIA
Document G705, Certificate of Insurance. If this insurance is written on a Commercial General Liability policy
form, ACORD Form 255 will be acceptable.
Add the following Clauses 11.1.3.1. and 11.1.3.2. to 11.1.3:
11.1.3.1
The Contractor shall furnish one copy each of Certificate of Insurance
herein required for each copy of the Agreement which shall specifically set
forth evidence of all coverage required by Subparagraph 11.1.1., 11.1.2
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
008100 - 6
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
and 11.1.3. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner copies of any
endorsements that are subsequently issued amending coverage or limits.
11.1.3.2.
11.3
Insurance policies to be submitted to Owner prior to Award for approval of
language.
Property Insurance
Add the following sentence to 11.3.1.1:
11.3.1.1The property insurance is provided by others.
Add the following sentence to 11.3.1.3:
11.3.1.3The property insurance is provided by others.
Delete Clause 11.3.1.4 as written and substitute the following:
11.3.1.4The Contractor shall provide insurance coverage for portions of the work stored off the site
after written approval of the Owner at the value established in the approval, and
also for portions of the work in transit. This supercedes any other portion of this
document.
11.4
PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND
11.4.1
Delete entirely and substitute the following:
If accepted by the owner, the Contractor shall furnish bonds covering faithful
performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder. Bonds
may be obtained through the Contractor's usual source, providing they are
acceptable to Owner, and the cost thereof shall be included in the Contract Sum.
The amount of each bond shall be equal to 100 percent of the Contract Sum.
11.4.1.1
The Contractor shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than
three days following the Agreement is entered into, or if the Work is to be
commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Contractor
shall, prior to the commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory
to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished.
11.4.1.2
The Contractor shall require the Attorney-In-Fact who executes the required
bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of
the power of attorney.
ARTICLE 12 - UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK
12.3
ACCEPTANCE OF NON-CONFORMING WORK
Add the following subparagraph 12.3.1 to paragraph 12.3:
12.3.1 The "reduction in the Contract Sum" referred to in subparagraph 12.3 shall be equal to the
entire cost or replacing the work as originally specified and intended.
ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
008100 - 7
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
13.4
Rights and Remedies -- Add the following Clause 13.4.3. to paragraph 13.4:
13.4.3 Indemnification: The Contractor shall defend, save and hold harmless the Owner, Architect
and his consultants and employees from and against any and all loss liability, damage, cost
and expense, including but not Limited to reasonable attorney's fees, which may arise as a
consequence of an act negligence on the part of the Contractor, Subcontractors or their
employees.
Add the following new article and paragraph as follows:
ARTICLE 16 - ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS
16.1
CONTRACTOR'S GUARANTEE
15.1.1 As a condition to issuance of Certificate of Substantial Completion, the Contract shall furnish
the Owner with three (3) executed forms of the Contractor's Guarantee included in section
00900.
16.2
INTERRUPTION OF SERVICES
16.2.1 Existing services shall not be interrupted under any circumstances without the specific
approval of the Owner and only at such times as may be designated by the Owner. Down
time shall be an absolute minimum.
16.3
CONTRACT SUM
16.3.1 The contract sum will not be increase because of increases in labor rates.
END OF SECTION 008100
SUPPLEMENTAL CONDITIONS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
008100 - 8
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3
Work covered by the Contract Documents.
Type of the Contract.
Work under other contracts.
Use of premises.
Owner's occupancy requirements.
Sole source items.
Owner furnished products.
WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A.
Project Identification: Project is a new interior upfit of an existing tenant space for the CSL
Plasma Center, located in Gilbert. AZ as shown on Contract Documents by NOVUS
ARCHITECTS, INC.
1.
Work includes interior and exterior selective demolition of existing building space,
with complete interior upfit and exterior modifications, including but not limited to,
framing, millwork, wood doors, hollow metal work, hardware, glazing, interior
finishes, plumbing, HVAC, electrical systems, lighting, and fire protection.
B.
Owner: CSL Plasma, 900 Broken Sound Parkway, Suite 400, Boca Raton, FL 22406.
C.
Architect: NOVUS ARCHTECTS, INC., 900 Johnnie Dodds Blvd., Suite 200, PO Box 1005, Mt.
Pleasant, SC 29465.
1.4
TYPE OF CONTRACT
A.
1.5
Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.
WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS
A.
General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried
out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work
of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.
SUMMARY
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
011000 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
B.
1.6
Concurrent Work: Owner may award separate contract(s) for the following construction
operations at Project site. Those operations will be conducted simultaneously with work under
this Contract.
1.
Freezer install.
USE OF PREMISES
A.
Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site
beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.
1.
2.
B.
Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout
construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations.
1.
1.7
Contractor shall coordinate access to the site with the Owner’s representatives.
Location of construction trailers and equipment to be approved by Owner’s
representative.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine if
existing conditions match those indicated on Drawings. Report any inconsistencies to
Architect.
OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Partial Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to
occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial
Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such
placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1.
1.8
Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully
operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On
occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving
occupied portions of building.
SOLE SOURCE ITEMS
A.
1.9
Owner may require that certain work must be performed by a designated subcontractor. This
subcontractor will supply and install the items within its scope of work. The General Contractor will
hire, coordinate and provide payment for this subcontractor under the General Contractor’s
contract. Refer to spec sections and plans for further details.
OWNER-FURNISHED / OWNER INSTALLED PRODUCTS
A.
Owner will furnish and install certain interior furnishings and equipment, as indicated on
Drawings. Work by the Contractor includes providing support systems to receive Owner's
equipment and service connections.
1.
2.
3.
Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings and Product Data to Contractor, for
coordination purposes.
Owner will arrange and pay for delivery and installation of Owner-furnished items.
Owner will coordinate with Contractor regarding delivery and installation dates for Ownerfurnished / Owner Installed products.
SUMMARY
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
011000 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
4.
1.10
A.
Contractor may, on occasion, be requested to receive and protect Owner furnished /
Owner installed items. Contractor is responsible for protecting these Owner-furnished
items from damage during storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the
elements.
OWNER-FURNISHED / CONTRACTOR INSTALLED PRODUCTS
Owner will furnish interior signage and certain interior furnishings and equipment for installation
by Contractor, as indicated on Drawings. The Work includes providing support systems to
receive Owner's equipment and service connections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Owner will arrange for and deliver Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to
Contractor.
Owner will arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
After delivery, Owner will inspect delivered items for damage. Contractor shall be
present for and assist in Owner's inspection.
If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for
replacement.
Owner will arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's
warranties to Contractor.
Owner will furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner-furnished
products. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, Contractor shall
designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Contractor shall review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to
Architect noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product.
Contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading, and handling Owner-furnished items at
Project site.
Contractor is responsible for protecting Owner-furnished items from damage during
storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements.
If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor
shall repair or replace them.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 011000
SUMMARY
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
011000 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 012100 - ALLOWANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing allowances.
B.
Types of allowances include the following:
1.
Contingency allowance.
1.2
ACTION SUBMITTALS
1.3
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Submit time sheets and other documentation to show labor time and cost for installation of
allowance items that include installation as part of the allowance.
COORDINATION
A.
1.5
Coordinate allowance items with other portions of the Work. Furnish templates as required to
coordinate installation.
CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCES
A.
Use the contingency allowance only as directed by Architect for Owner's purposes and only by
Change Orders that indicate amounts to be charged to the allowance.
B.
Change Orders authorizing use of funds from the contingency allowance will include
Contractor's related costs and reasonable overhead and profit margins.
C.
At Project closeout, credit unused amounts remaining in the contingency allowance to Owner by
Change Order.
1.6
ADJUSTMENT OF ALLOWANCES
A.
Allowance Adjustment: To adjust allowance amounts, prepare a Change Order proposal based
on the difference between purchase amount and the allowance, multiplied by final measurement
of work-in-place where applicable. If applicable, include reasonable allowances for cutting
losses, tolerances, mixing wastes, normal product imperfections, and similar margins.
1.
If requested, prepare explanation and documentation to substantiate distribution of
overhead costs and other margins claimed.
ALLOWANCES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
012100 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Coordinate materials and their installation for each allowance with related materials and
installations to ensure that each allowance item is completely integrated and interfaced with
related work.
SCHEDULE OF ALLOWANCES
A.
A Schedule of Alternates is included on Sheet G001 of the Drawings.
END OF SECTION 012100
ALLOWANCES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
012100 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined
in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if
Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be
completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described
in the Contract Documents.
1.
1.4
The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract
Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the
Contract Sum.
PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate
work of the alternate into Project.
1.
Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar
items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part
of alternate.
B.
Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing,
of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred
for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates.
C.
Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.
D.
Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included on Sheet G001 of the Drawings.
END OF SECTION 012300
ALTERNATES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
012300 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing
Contract modifications.
MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
A.
1.4
Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710,
"Architect's Supplemental Instructions."
PROPOSAL REQUESTS
A.
Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Project Manager will issue a detailed description of
proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract
Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and
Specifications.
1.
2.
Proposal Requests issued by Project Manager are for information only. Do not consider
them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.
Unless otherwise indicated in the proposal request, within 20 days after receipt of
Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum
and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey
data to substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of
trade discounts.
Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an
extension of the Contract Time.
Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the
Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect
and Construction Manager.
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
012600 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
1.5
Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.
Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to
substantiate quantities.
Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade
discounts.
Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.
Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the
Contract Time.
Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed
change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests.
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES
A.
1.6
On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Project Manager will issue a Change Order for
signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE
A.
Construction Change Directive: Project Manager may issue a Construction Change Directive
on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a
change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.
1.
B.
Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It
also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the
Contract Time.
Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the
Construction Change Directive.
1.
After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary
to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012600
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
012600 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 012700 - UNIT PRICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
Unit price is an amount proposed by contractor, as a price per unit of measurement for
materials or services added to or deducted from the Contract Sum by appropriate modification,
if estimated quantities of Work required by the Contract Documents are increased or decreased.
PROCEDURES
A.
Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance,
applicable taxes, overhead, and profit.
B.
Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires
establishment of unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are
specified in those Sections.
C.
Owner reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use
of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at Owner's expense, by an
independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.
D.
List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included on Sheet G001 of the Drawings.
END OF SECTION 012700
UNIT PRICES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
012700 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and
process Applications for Payment.
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A.
Coordination:
Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of
Contractor's Construction Schedule. Cost-loaded CPM Schedule may serve to satisfy
requirements for the Schedule of Values.
1.
Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms
and schedules, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
B.
Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.
Submittals Schedule.
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Submit the Schedule of Values to Construction Manager at earliest possible date but no
later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for
Payment.
Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items
for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.
1.
Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
Project name and location.
Name of Construction Manager.
Construction Manager's project number.
Contractor's name and address.
Date of submittal.
Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets.
Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the
following for each item listed:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Related Specification Section or Division.
Description of the Work.
Name of subcontractor.
Name of manufacturer or fabricator.
Name of supplier.
Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
Dollar value.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
012900 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1)
4.
5.
6.
Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project
Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts,
where appropriate. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for
operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents,
and demonstration and training in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum.
Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.
Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where
Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated
and stored, but not yet installed.
a.
7.
8.
9.
1.4
Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified,
include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing.
Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each
subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.
Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance.
Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by
measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine
quantities.
Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete.
Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.
a.
10.
Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted
to total 100 percent.
Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual
work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of
Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result
in a change in the Contract Sum.
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT
A.
Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as
certified by Construction Manager and paid for by Owner.
1.
Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion,
and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.
B.
Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement
between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application
for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.
C.
Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation
Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.
D.
Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Construction Manager will return
incomplete applications without action.
1.
2.
Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction
Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.
Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before
last day of construction period covered by application.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
012900 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
E.
Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to
Construction Manager by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include
waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.
1.
F.
Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's
liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by
the previous application.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
G.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
List of subcontractors.
Schedule of Values.
Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).
Products list.
Schedule of unit prices.
Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).
List of Contractor's staff assignments.
List of Contractor's principal consultants.
Copies of building permits.
Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance
of Work.
Initial progress report.
Report of preconstruction conference.
Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.
Performance and payment bonds.
Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.
Initial settlement survey and damage report if required.
Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of
the Work claimed as substantially complete.
1.
2.
I.
Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after
deduction for retainage, on each item.
When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.
Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit
waivers.
Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity
involved with performance of the Work covered by application who is lawfully entitled to a
lien.
Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to
Owner.
Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
H.
Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate
information about application.
Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.
This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the
following:
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
012900 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.
Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.
Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.
AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."
AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."
AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."
Evidence that claims have been settled.
Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.
Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 012900
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
012900 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on
Project including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
General project coordination procedures.
Administrative and supervisory personnel.
Project meetings.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees
at meetings.
1.
C.
Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before
or after its own installation.
Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum
accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.
Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to
ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and
repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.
Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their
Work is required.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Preparation of the Schedule of Values.
Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.
Delivery and processing of submittals.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
013100 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
D.
Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of
temporary utilities to minimize waste.
1.
1.4
Progress meetings.
Preinstallation conferences.
Project closeout activities.
Startup and adjustment of systems.
Project closeout activities.
Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually
incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials
that are designated as Owner's property.
PROJECT MEETINGS
A.
General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner, Project Manager and Architect
of scheduled meeting dates and times.
Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.
Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the
meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three
days of the meeting.
Preconstruction Conference:
Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting
construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Project Manager, but no later than 15 days
after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient
location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.
1.
2.
Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Project Manager, Architect, and their
consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and
other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference
shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
Tentative construction schedule.
Phasing.
Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.
Designation of key personnel and their duties.
Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.
Procedures for requests for interpretations (RFIs).
Procedures for testing and inspecting.
Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.
Distribution of the Contract Documents.
Submittal procedures.
Preparation of Record Documents.
Use of the premises.
Work restrictions.
Owner's occupancy requirements.
Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.
Construction waste management.
Parking availability.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
013100 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
3.
C.
Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.
Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.
1.
2.
Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect
and Construction Manager of scheduled meeting dates.
Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
s.
t.
u.
v.
w.
x.
y.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Office, work, and storage areas.
Equipment deliveries and priorities.
First aid.
Security.
Progress cleaning.
Working hours.
The Contract Documents.
Options.
Related requests for interpretations (RFIs).
Related Change Orders.
Purchases.
Deliveries.
Submittals.
Review of mockups.
Possible conflicts.
Compatibility problems.
Time schedules.
Weather limitations.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
Warranty requirements.
Compatibility of materials.
Acceptability of substrates.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Space and access limitations.
Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
Testing and inspecting requirements.
Installation procedures.
Coordination with other work.
Required performance results.
Protection of adjacent work.
Protection of construction and personnel.
Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including
required corrective measures and actions.
Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regularly scheduled intervals, unless
otherwise indicated in Agreement. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates.
Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
013100 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.
2.
Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner, Project Manager and Architect, each
contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or
involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented
at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and
authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as
appropriate to status of Project.
a.
b.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind
schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how
construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties
involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that
current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.
Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)
10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
15)
16)
17)
18)
19)
20)
3.
4.
Interface requirements.
Sequence of operations.
Status of submittals.
Deliveries.
Off-site fabrication.
Access.
Site utilization.
Temporary facilities and controls.
Work hours.
Hazards and risks.
Progress cleaning.
Quality and work standards.
Status of correction of deficient items.
Field observations.
Requests for interpretations (RFIs).
Status of proposal requests.
Pending changes.
Status of Change Orders.
Pending claims and disputes.
Documentation of information for payment requests.
Minutes: Record and distribute to attendees the meeting minutes.
Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who
should have been present.
a.
Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each
progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized.
Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 013100
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
013100 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress
of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Submittals Schedule.
Daily construction reports.
Material location reports.
Field condition reports.
Special reports.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a
tabular format:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Scheduled date for first submittal.
Specification Section number and title.
Submittal category (action or informational).
Name of subcontractor.
Description of the Work covered.
Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
B.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large
enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period.
C.
Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies at monthly intervals.
D.
Material Location Reports: Submit two copies at monthly intervals.
E.
Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.
F.
Special Reports: Submit two copies at time of unusual event.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of
construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
013200 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
B.
Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of
subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required
schedules and reports.
1.
2.
Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties
involved.
Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule
them in proper sequence.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE
A.
Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates
required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering,
manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.
1.
2.
2.2
Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and
Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's
Construction Schedule.
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Procedures:
Scheduling."
B.
Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type,
Contractor's Construction Schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to
Proceed. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and
feedback was received since the start of Project.
C.
Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of
each week with a continuous vertical line.
2.3
Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning &
REPORTS
A.
Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following
information concerning events at Project site:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
List of subcontractors at Project site.
List of separate contractors at Project site.
Approximate count of personnel at Project site.
Equipment at Project site.
Material deliveries.
High and low temperatures and general weather conditions.
Accidents.
Meetings and significant decisions.
Unusual events (refer to special reports).
Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.
Meter readings and similar recordings.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
013200 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Emergency procedures.
Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.
Change Orders received and implemented.
Construction Change Directives received and implemented.
Services connected and disconnected.
Equipment or system tests and startups.
Partial Completions and occupancies.
Substantial Completions authorized.
B.
Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of
materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials
previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on
and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project
site.
C.
Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and
the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for
interpretation on CSI Form 13.2A. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions,
together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
2.4
SPECIAL REPORTS
A.
General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute
copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.
B.
Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at
Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report.
List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of
results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these
events are known or predictable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE
A.
Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly
scheduled progress meeting.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each
such meeting.
Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.
As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors,
testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know
schedule responsibility.
1.
Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
013200 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.
When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in
the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their
assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction
activities.
END OF SECTION 013200
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
013200 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.
CAD DRAWINGS
A.
1.4
General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings may be provided by the
Architect for Contractor’s use in preparing submittals for a nominal fee.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A.
Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities.
1.
2.
Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals,
and related activities that require sequential activity.
Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for
coordination.
B.
Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress
Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of
related construction activities.
C.
Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of
the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in
advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if
coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor
when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.
Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner
as initial submittal.
Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.
1.
Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
013300 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.
3.
Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.
Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
Project name.
Date.
Name and address of Architect.
Name and address of Contractor.
Name and address of subcontractor.
Name and address of supplier.
Name of manufacturer.
Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.
Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.
Other necessary identification.
E.
Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract
Documents on submittals.
F.
Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless
Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal
may serve as final submittal.
1.
2.
G.
Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling.
Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without
review, received from sources other than Contractor.
1.
2.
H.
Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of
copies to Architect.
Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action
taken and will be returned.
Transmittal Form: Use Architect-approved form.
On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant
information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on
previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents,
including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related
submittal.
Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.
1.
2.
3.
Note date and content of previous submittal.
Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of
revision.
Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Approved."
I.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.
J.
Use for Construction:
Architect.
Use only final submittals with mark indicating "Approved" taken by
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
013300 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.1
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.
B.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and
type of product or equipment.
1.
2.
3.
If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.
Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.
Include the following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Manufacturer's written recommendations.
Manufacturer's product specifications.
Manufacturer's installation instructions.
Standard color charts.
Manufacturer's catalog cuts.
Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.
Printed performance curves.
Operational range diagrams.
Mill reports.
Standard product operation and maintenance manuals.
Compliance with specified referenced standards.
Testing by recognized testing agency.
Application of testing agency labels and seals.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.
Number of Copies: Submit three copies of Product Data for submittals to be reviewed by
Architect; submit four copies of Product Data for submittals to be reviewed by
consultants, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. Mark up and
retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.
At Contractor’s and Architect’s mutual consent, electronic pdf submittals may be
substituted for hard copies.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base
Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.
1.
Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents.
following information, as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
m.
n.
Include the
Dimensions.
Identification of products.
Fabrication and installation drawings.
Roughing-in and setting diagrams.
Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control
wiring.
Shopwork manufacturing instructions.
Templates and patterns.
Schedules.
Design calculations.
Compliance with specified standards.
Notation of coordination requirements.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.
Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
013300 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
o.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches .
Number of Copies: Submit three (3) opaque (bond) copies of each submittal to be
reviewed by Architect; submit four (4) copies of each submittal to be reviewed by
consultants. Architect will return two copies.
At Contractor’s and Architect’s mutual consent, electronic pdf submittals may be
substituted for hard copies.
Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.
1.
2.
Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories
together in one submittal package.
Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
Generic description of Sample.
Product name and name of manufacturer.
Sample source.
Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.
Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for qualitycontrol comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent
testing and inspection.
a.
E.
Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed
wiring.
Number of Samples: Submit two sets of Samples.
Sample set; remainder will be returned.
Architect will retain one
Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written
summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include
the following information in tabular form:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product.
Number and name of room or space.
Location within room or space.
Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise
indicated. Architect will return two copies.
a.
Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.
F.
Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction
Progress Documentation."
G.
Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment
Procedures."
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
013300 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
H.
2.2
Schedule of Values:
Procedures."
Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.
1.
2.
3.
Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.
Architect will not return copies.
Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that
entity.
Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section
"Quality Requirements."
B.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section
"Construction Progress Documentation."
C.
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of
firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
D.
Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that item
complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of experience where
required.
E.
Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.
F.
Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect
for Project. Include the following information:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Name of evaluation organization.
Date of evaluation.
Time period when report is in effect.
Product and manufacturers' names.
Description of product.
Test procedures and results.
Limitations of use.
G.
Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."
H.
Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance
and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of
assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load
diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations.
Include page numbers.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
013300 - 5
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
I.
Manufacturer's Instructions:
Prepare written or published information that documents
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of
manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
J.
2.3
Preparation of substrates.
Required substrate tolerances.
Sequence of installation or erection.
Required installation tolerances.
Required adjustments.
Recommendations for cleaning and protection.
Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of
coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.
DELEGATED DESIGN
A.
Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1.
B.
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a
written request for additional information to Architect.
Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required
submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design
professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or
certified by a design professional.
1.
Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing
these services.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW
A.
Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for
compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with
approval stamp before submitting to Architect.
B.
Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.2
ARCHITECT'S/ ACTION
A.
General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and
will return them without action.
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
013300 - 6
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
B.
Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or
modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp
and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Approved: Where submittals are marked "Approved," that part of Work covered by
submittal may proceed provided it complies with requirements of Contract Documents; final
acceptance will depend upon that compliance.
Furnish As Corrected: When submittals are marked "Furnish as Corrected," that part of
Work covered by submittal may proceed provided it complies with notations or corrections
on submittal and requirements of Contract Documents; final acceptance will depend on that
compliance.
Revise and Resubmit: When submittal is marked "Revise and Resubmit," do not proceed
with that part of Work covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or
other activity. Revise or prepare new submittal in accordance with notations; resubmit
without delay. Repeat if necessary to obtain different action mark.
Rejected: When submittal is marked "Rejected," do not proceed with that part of Work
covered by submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity.
Other Action: Where submittal is primarily for information or record purposes, special
processing or other activity, submittal will be returned, marked "Not Reviewed".
C.
Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return
it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate
party.
D.
Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned
without review.
E.
Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be
discarded.
END OF SECTION 013300
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
013300 - 7
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and
quality control.
B.
Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the
Contract Document requirements.
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities
are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those
Sections may also cover production of standard products.
Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document
requirements.
Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required
by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this
Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed
construction will comply with requirements.
B.
Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and
completed construction comply with requirements.
Services do not include contract
enforcement activities performed by Architect.
C.
Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to
verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where
indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing,
or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the
Work will be judged.
D.
Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project
before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or
compliance with specified criteria.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
014000 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
E.
Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to
establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.
F.
Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation
of the Work and for completed Work.
G.
Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.
H.
Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.
I.
Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a
minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with
special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
J.
Typical Inspections: Typical Inspections include, as applicable, those described in the following
documents:
1.
K.
1.4
Administrative sections of locally adopted codes.
Special Inspections: Special Inspections of materials, installation, fabrication, erection or
placement of components and connections, shall be performed as indicated in Section 1704 of
the IBC or other applicable building codes, unless approved otherwise by authorities having
jurisdiction. Special Inspections require special expertise to ensure compliance with approved
construction documents and referenced standards.
CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish
different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the
most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but
apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.
B.
Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision
before proceeding.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate
their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on
the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.
B.
Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:
1.
Date of issue.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
014000 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
C.
1.6
Project title and number.
Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.
Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.
Names of individuals making tests and inspections.
Description of the Work and test and inspection method.
Identification of product and Specification Section.
Complete test or inspection data.
Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.
Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and
inspecting.
Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with
the Contract Document requirements.
Name and signature of laboratory inspector.
Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.
DELEGATED DESIGN
A.
Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.
1.
1.7
If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a
written request for additional information to Architect.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.8
Copies of Regulations: Obtain copies of the applicable regulations and retain at Project site to
be available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.
B.
Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.
C.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar
to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.
D.
Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated
for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient
production capacity to produce required units.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
014000 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
E.
Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering
services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for
installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this
Project in material, design, and extent.
F.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according
to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.
1.
2.
NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.
NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory
Accreditation Program.
G.
Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for
this Project.
H.
Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using
materials indicated for the completed Work:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.9
Build mockups in location and of size as directed by Architect. Composite exterior wall
mockup is required by CCDRB and DIARB. Architect will provide sketch of required
mockup.
Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be
constructed.
Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.
Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.
Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for
judging the completed Work.
Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.
QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Owner Responsibilities: For tests or inspections where quality-control services are indicated as
Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.
1.
2.
B.
Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing
agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are
engaged to perform.
Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.
Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services for soil
testing and as otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
Contractor shall engage a qualified testing agency to perform soil testing quality-control
services.
a.
Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to
in writing by Owner.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
014000 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires
testing or inspecting will be performed.
Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.
Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.
Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,
when they so direct.
Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests
and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Testing agency will notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and
deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar
quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial
Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.
Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether
tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.
Testing agency will retest and reinspect corrected work. Contractor will reimburse owner
via change order for additional expenses incurred due to cancellation of testing, testing
due to corrected work that does not meet the contract documents, and retesting of items
found by the special inspector to be deficient.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Services:
Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal
Procedures."
E.
Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.
F.
Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
G.
Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the
Work during performance of its services.
Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests
are conducted.
Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.
Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol service through Contractor.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or
approve or accept any portion of the Work.
Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the
following:
1.
Access to the Work.
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
014000 - 5
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
H.
Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.
Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.
Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.
Delivery of samples to testing agencies.
Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing
agency.
Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project
site.
Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing
construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.
1.
Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
TEST AND INSPECTION LOG
A.
Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
3.2
Date test or inspection was conducted.
Description of the Work tested or inspected.
Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.
Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.
Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to
test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
REPAIR AND PROTECTION
A.
General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.
1.
2.
Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining
areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section "Cutting and
Patching."
B.
Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.
C.
Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of
responsibility for quality-control services.
END OF SECTION 014000
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
014000 - 6
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary
utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
USE CHARGES
A.
General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner or Architect
and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and
facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Owner's construction forces.
Occupants of Project.
Architect.
Testing agencies.
Personnel of authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Water Service: Water from existing water system is available for use without payment of use
charges, once Contractor has connected to existing metered services. Provide connections and
extensions of services as required for construction operations.
C.
Electric Power Service: Electric power from existing system is available for use without
payment of use charges, once Contractor has connected to existing metered services. Provide
connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction, including, but not limited to:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Building code requirements.
Health and safety regulations.
Utility company regulations.
Police, Fire Department and Rescue Squad rules.
Environmental protection regulations.
B.
Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
015000 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage installer of each permanent service to assume
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned
responsibilities.
B.
Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by
all parties engaged in the Work:
1.
2.
Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat.
Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable
condition may be used if approved by Architect. Provide materials suitable for use intended.
B.
Water: Potable.
2.2
TEMPORARY FACILITIES
A.
Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.
B.
Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel.
Keep office clean and orderly. Locate as directed by Owner.
2.3
EQUIPMENT
A.
Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by
locations and classes of fire exposures.
B.
HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,
self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.
1.
2.
3.
Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating
units is prohibited.
Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for
temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in
system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in
Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
015000 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.
B.
Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as
required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use
of completed permanent facilities.
3.2
TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.
1.
B.
Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.
Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as
facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial
Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.
1.
Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a
drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly
from pans.
C.
Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of
construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,
operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
D.
Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.
E.
Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.
F.
Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as
long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.
G.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for
construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.
1.
H.
Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements
without operating entire system.
Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service,
including electronic mail, in common-use facilities.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
015000 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
3.3
SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.
B.
Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.
1.
2.
3.
Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings.
Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and
individuals seeking entrance to Project.
Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.
C.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle
waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements.
D.
Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.
3.4
SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION
A.
Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct
construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible
air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.
B.
Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control
procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial
Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using
environmentally safe materials.
C.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.
D.
Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated
and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
E.
Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with
NFPA 241.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
Prohibit smoking in construction areas.
Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel
at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.
Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning
sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed.
Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.
OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL
A.
Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
015000 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
B.
Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.
damage caused by freezing temperatures and similar elements.
C.
Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as
available, do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to
permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.
D.
Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.
1.
2.
Protect from
Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor.
Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.
At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 01 Section
"Closeout Procedures."
END OF SECTION 015000
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
015000 - 5
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for
use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on
products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and
title and Drawing numbers and titles.
1.
Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,
as applicable:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.
Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.
Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of
the Work specified.
Significant qualities may include attributes such as
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and
requirements indicated.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and
installation procedures.
Samples, where applicable or requested.
List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.
Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test
results for compliance with requirements indicated.
Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for
Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's
letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.
Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.
Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in
the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
016000 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
l.
2.
Architect's Action:
If necessary, Architect will request additional information or
documentation for evaluation within 3 days of receipt of a request for substitution.
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within
10 days of receipt of request, or 5 days of receipt of additional information or
documentation, whichever is later.
a.
b.
1.4
Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce
indicated results.
Form of Acceptance: Change Order.
Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed
substitution within time allocated.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Delivery and Handling:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Storage:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.5
Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent
overcrowding of construction spaces.
Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other
losses.
Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.
Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.
Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.
Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.
Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.
Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.
Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of
installation and concealment.
Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.
Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.
PRODUCT WARRANTIES
A.
Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
016000 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.
2.
B.
Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.
1.
2.
C.
Manufacturer's Warranty:
Preprinted written warranty published by individual
manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to
Owner.
Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract
Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide
more rights for Owner.
Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and
properly executed.
Refer to Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific content requirements and particular
requirements for submitting special warranties.
Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES
A.
General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,
that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Product Selection Procedures:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.
Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used
successfully in similar situations on other projects.
Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make
selection.
Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is
Architect's.
Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the
named product that complies with requirements.
Manufacturer: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a
product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.
Products:
Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.
Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a
product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.
Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of
manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other
named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions,
and other characteristics that are based on the product named.
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
016000 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
A.
Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 30 days after
commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected
at discretion of Architect.
B.
Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner
must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect
for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and
similar considerations.
Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.
Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce
indicated results.
Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.
Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule.
Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having
jurisdiction.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.
Requested substitution provides specified warranty.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 016000
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
016000 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 017000 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Construction layout.
General installation of products.
Progress cleaning.
Starting and adjusting.
Protection of installed construction.
Correction of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and
verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction
affecting the Work.
1.
B.
Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or
Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.2
Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing
finishes or primers.
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of
connections before equipment and fixture installation.
Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are
to be installed.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
017000 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
A.
Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
B.
Space Requirements:
Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
C.
Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for
clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a
detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the
Contract Documents. Submit requests on CSI Form 13.2A, "Request for Interpretation."
3.3
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT
A.
Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on
Drawings, in relation to the Owner-provided property survey and existing benchmarks. If
discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.
B.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain
required dimensions. Do not use electronic files scaled. Dimensions indicated on
Drawings shall govern.
Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.
Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.
Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable
tolerances.
C.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.
D.
Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.
3.4
FIELD ENGINEERING
A.
Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.
B.
Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control
points during construction operations.
1.
Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written
approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points
promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to
Architect before proceeding.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
017000 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.
C.
Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base
replacements on the original survey control points.
Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record
Documents.
Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide
temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.
Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed.
Restore marked
construction to its original condition.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and
elevation, as indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.
Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance
and ease of removal for replacement.
Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in
applications indicated.
C.
Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
D.
Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.
E.
Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.
F.
Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated
requirements.
G.
Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component
securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.
1.
2.
3.
H.
Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at
heights directed by Architect.
Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
Coordinate installation of anchorages.
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver
such items to Project site in time for installation.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
017000 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
I.
3.6
Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered
hazardous.
PROGRESS CLEANING
A.
General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate
progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.
C.
Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for
proper execution of the Work.
1.
2.
3.7
Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and
debris.
Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the
temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F .
Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
Remove liquid spills promptly.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the
entire work area, as appropriate.
D.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed
surfaces.
E.
Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.
F.
Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to
ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
G.
Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing
waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.
H.
During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.
I.
Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure
operability without damaging effects.
J.
Limiting Exposures:
Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
STARTING AND ADJUSTING
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
017000 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
A.
Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation.
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.
B.
Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper
operation.
C.
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D.
Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to
inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification
requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."
3.8
Remove
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
B.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.9
CORRECTION OF THE WORK
A.
Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and
finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."
B.
Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.
C.
Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired
without visible evidence of repair.
D.
Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components
that cannot be repaired.
E.
Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.
END OF SECTION 017000
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
017000 - 5
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change
their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.
B.
Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a
manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased
maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.
C.
Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components
in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity
to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or
safety. Miscellaneous elements include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.
Membranes and flashings.
Exterior curtain-wall construction.
Equipment supports.
Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.
Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.
Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or
in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a
visually unsatisfactory manner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.
B.
In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use
materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
017329 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.
If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when
installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to
be performed.
1.
2.
3.2
Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates,
including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.
Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.
B.
Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be
exposed during cutting and patching operations.
C.
Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage
to adjoining areas.
3.3
PERFORMANCE
A.
General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and
patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.
1.
B.
Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their
original condition.
Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply
with original Installer's written recommendations.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size
required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover
openings when not in use.
Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.
Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a
diamond-core drill.
Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.
Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
CUTTING AND PATCHING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
017329 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
C.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations
following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as
possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other
Sections.
1.
2.
3.
Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to
demonstrate integrity of installation.
Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of
patching and refinishing.
Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and
appearance.
a.
4.
5.
6.
D.
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint
coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface
containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent
surfaces.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an evenplane surface of uniform appearance.
Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a
weathertight condition.
Roofing: Perform cutting and patching of roof membrane in accordance with warranty
requirements of existing roof membrane manufacturer.
Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely
remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials.
END OF SECTION 017329
CUTTING AND PATCHING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
017329 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,
including, but not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Inspection procedures.
Project Record Documents.
Operation and maintenance manuals.
Warranties.
Instruction of Owner's personnel.
Final cleaning.
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.
Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final
certifications, and similar documents.
Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar
releases.
Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,
Final Completion construction photographs, paint color schedules and similar final record
information.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.
Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's
personnel of changeover in security provisions.
Complete startup testing of systems.
Submit test/adjust/balance records.
Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,
construction tools, and similar elements.
Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.
Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and
maintenance.
Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual
defects.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
017700 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.4
FINAL COMPLETION
A.
Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final
Completion, complete the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.5
Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment
Procedures."
Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance
requirements.
Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.
Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,
equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes.
LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)
A.
Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and
area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction
including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.
Use CSI Form 14.1A or other Architect approved form.
1.
2.
3.
Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and
proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.
Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.
Include the following information at the top of each page:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
1.6
Project name.
Date.
Name of Architect.
Name of Contractor.
Page number.
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A.
General: Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project
Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents
for Architect's reference during normal working hours.
B.
Record Drawings: Maintain and submit one set of blue- or black-line white prints of Contract
Drawings and Shop Drawings.
1.
Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that
shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether
individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up
Record Prints.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that cannot be
readily identified and recorded later.
Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.
Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup
before enclosing concealed installations.
Mark Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. Where Shop Drawings are
marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
017700 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and
contract modifications. Mark copy to indicate the actual product installation where installation
varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.
1.
2.
3.
D.
2.
3.
4.
1.7
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.
Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data, where applicable.
Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal. Mark one set to
indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated
in Product Data.
1.
E.
Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish
between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.
Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted
from original Drawings.
Note Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate
numbers, and similar identification where applicable.
Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD
DRAWING" in a prominent location. Organize into manageable sets; bind each set with
durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.
Final Submittal: Submit two sets of marked-up Record Prints and one electronic set on
CD-R.
Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.
Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.
Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Record Specifications, where
applicable.
Product Data Summary: Submit to Architect, a summary listing, in electronic format, of
products, manufacturers, suppliers and contact information.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals:
Assemble miscellaneous records required by other
Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual
performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for
continued use and reference.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A.
Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and
maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include
operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows:
1.
Operation Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Emergency instructions and procedures.
System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards.
Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend
operations.
Description of controls and sequence of operations.
Piping diagrams.
2.
Maintenance Data:
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
017700 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts.
Name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier.
Maintenance procedures.
Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance.
Maintenance record forms.
Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials.
Copies of maintenance service agreements.
Copies of warranties and bonds.
B.
Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and
index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to
accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets.
Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents.
C.
Final Submittal: Submit one set of printed Operation and Maintenance Manual and one
electronic set on CD-R.
1.8
WARRANTIES
A.
Submittal Time: Submit written warranties at Substantial Completion. Warranty period shall
commence at date of Substantial Completion, exclusive of any time of operation during
construction.
B.
Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of
designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during
construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.
C.
Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the
Project Manual.
1.
2.
3.
D.
Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders,
thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch
paper.
Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark
tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or
installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone
number of Installer.
Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES,"
Project name, and name of Contractor.
Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
017700 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A.
Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems,
and equipment not part of a system.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for
each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification
Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include
instruction for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.2
Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures.
Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal
operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season.
Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance
notice.
Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of
instruction, and course content.
System design and operational philosophy.
Review of documentation.
Operations.
Adjustments.
Troubleshooting.
Maintenance.
Repair.
FINAL CLEANING
A.
General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution
regulations.
B.
Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification
of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and
other foreign substances.
Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other
foreign deposits.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured
surface.
Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from
Project site.
Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.
Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
017700 - 5
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
l.
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original
condition.
Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including plenums,
shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.
Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.
Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.
Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials.
Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.
Remove labels that are not permanent.
Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.
1)
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
r.
Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and
electrical nameplates.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and
similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and
other foreign substances.
Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.
Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains
resulting from water exposure.
Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.
Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply
with requirements for new fixtures.
Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
C.
Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid
Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
D.
Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of
lawfully.
END OF SECTION 017700
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
017700 - 6
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.
Demolition and removal of selected site elements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.
B.
Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent
damage, and deliver to Owner.
C.
Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall
where indicated.
D.
Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and
that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and
reinstalled.
1.3
FIELD CONDITIONS
A.
Other tenants may occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition
area. Conduct selective demolition so those operations will not be disrupted.
B.
Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding
with selective demolition.
C.
Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials may be present in buildings and structures to be
selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and
use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.
1.
2.
3.
Hazardous material remediation is the responsibility of the Contractor, unless determined
otherwise prior to bidding.
Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials
except under procedures approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
Existing asphalt roofing materials shall be assumed to contain asbestos.
D.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.
E.
Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against
damage during selective demolition operations.
1.
Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
024119 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.
1.4
Coordinate any interruption in services with Owner/Landlord
WARRANTY
A.
Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged
during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning
selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition
operations.
B.
Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of
selective demolition required.
C.
When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.
D.
Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any
element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or
adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.
E.
Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings and/or
preconstruction photographs.
1.
3.2
Comply with requirements specified in Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation."
UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
A.
Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and
protect them against damage.
1.
Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in
Section 011000 "Summary."
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
024119 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
B.
Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,
disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems
serving areas to be selectively demolished.
1.
Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
2.
Coordinate service interruption with Owner/Landlord.
3.
If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.
4.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC
systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.
C.
Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished
according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3
PREPARATION
A.
Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other
adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1.
Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."
B.
Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
C.
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required
to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes
to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction
being demolished.
3.4
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL
A.
General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of
governing regulations and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
remain.
Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
existing finished surfaces.
Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable
fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
024119 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
B.
3.5
Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS
A.
General: Except for items or materials indicated to be[ recycled,] reused, salvaged, reinstalled,
or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project
site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.6
Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.
Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
and areas.
Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
CLEANING
A.
Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition
operations began.
END OF SECTION 024119
SELECTIVE DEMOLITION
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
024119 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 035416 - HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes hydraulic-cement-based underlayment for use below interior floor
coverings.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Division 09 Sections for patching and leveling compounds applied with floor coverings.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
C.
Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of both underlayment and floor covering
system certifying that products are compatible.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications:
Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of
underlayment products required for this Project.
B.
Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of both underlayment and floor covering system certify in
writing that products are compatible.
C.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from
moisture or other detrimental effects.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate
temperature, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting
underlayment performance.
HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
035416 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.
1.7
Place hydraulic-cement-based underlayments only when ambient temperature and
temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor covering products, including
adhesives, specified in Division 09 Sections, to ensure compatibility of products.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS
A.
Underlayment: Hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be
applied in minimum uniform thicknesses of 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to
match adjacent floor elevations.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Ardex; K-15 Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete.
Bonsal, W. R. Company; Self-Leveling Underlayment.
L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Levelex.
Maxxon Corporation; Level-Right.
USG Corporation; Levelrock 4500.
Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement
as defined by ASTM C 219.
Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi at 28 days when tested according to
ASTM C 109/C 109M.
Underlayment Additive:
Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer
formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated.
Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch; or coarse sand as recommended by
underlayment manufacturer.
1.
Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for
underlayment thickness required.
C.
Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F.
D.
Reinforcement: For underlayment applied to wood substrates, provide galvanized metal lath or
other corrosion-resistant reinforcement recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.
E.
Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate,
conditions, and application indicated.
F.
Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for metal
substrates.
HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
035416 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance.
1.
B.
Substrate Tolerances: Check existing slabs for flatness.
1.
3.2
Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
Check and measure existing slab surfaces to verify that gap at any point between
concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot- long straightedge resting on 2
high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/8 inch.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
B.
Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to
prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.
Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.
Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions,
laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil,
and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.
1.
Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with
installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate
of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.
C.
Nonporous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove waxes,
sealants, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond, and prepare surfaces
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
3.3
APPLICATION
A.
General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
1.
2.
3.
Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application
recommended in writing by manufacturer.
Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and
intercoat adhesion.
At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to
continue through underlayment.
B.
Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.
C.
Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.
HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
035416 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.
2.
Apply a final layer without aggregate to produce surface.
Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.
D.
Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions.
during application and curing processes.
E.
Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing
by underlayment manufacturer.
F.
Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including
areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.
3.4
Prevent contamination
PROTECTION
A.
Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.
END OF SECTION 035416
HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
035416 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.
Metal ladders.
Ladder safety cages.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections,
and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.
B.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For ladders, including analysis data signed and sealed by the
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.2
Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000
"Quality Requirements," to design ladders.
METALS
A.
Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.
B.
Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
2.3
FASTENERS
A.
General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use
and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941
(ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class
required.
B.
Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.
1.
Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise
indicated.
METAL FABRICATIONS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
055000 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.
2.4
Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1)
stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594
(ASTM F 836M).
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 099113 "Exterior Painting."
B.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.
C.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by
manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
D.
Concrete: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normalweight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20
MPa).
2.5
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections
that maintain structural value of joined pieces.
B.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove
sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.
C.
Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or
welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
D.
Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.
2.6
MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A.
General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to
complete the Work.
B.
Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive
adjacent construction.
2.7
METAL LADDERS
A.
General:
1.
B.
Comply with ANSI A14.3.
Steel Ladders:
1.
2.
Space siderails 16 inches (406 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated.
Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch (9.5-by-64-mm) steel flat bars, with eased edges.
METAL FABRICATIONS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
055000 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.8
Rungs: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter steel bars.
Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.
Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung.
Galvanize exterior ladders, including brackets.
LADDER SAFETY CAGES
A.
Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by welding or with
stainless-steel fasteners.
B.
Provide primary hoops at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not more than 20 feet (6 m)
o.c. Provide secondary intermediate hoops spaced not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c.
between primary hoops.
C.
Galvanize steel ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners.
2.9
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
2.10
Finish metal fabrications after assembly.
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A.
Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel
and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.
B.
Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded
in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.
1.
C.
Shop prime with primers specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" unless indicated.
Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification
No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal
fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges
and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and
levels.
B.
Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:
METAL FABRICATIONS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
055000 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent
surface.
D.
Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.
E.
Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,
masonry, or similar construction.
3.2
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.
END OF SECTION 055000
METAL FABRICATIONS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
055000 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Steel pipe and tube railings.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:
1.
Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:
a.
b.
c.
2.
Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.
Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.
Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Infill of Guards:
a.
3.
B.
1.3
Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.
(0.093 sq. m).
b.
Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.
Cap Nuts:
a.
All exposed threaded studs and bolts to receive Stainless steel cap nuts.
Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
B.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METALS, GENERAL
A.
Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as
supported rails unless otherwise indicated.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
055213 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.2
STEEL AND IRON
A.
Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.
B.
Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless
another grade and weight are required by structural loads.
C.
Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
D.
Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless
otherwise indicated.
2.3
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Fasteners: Provide the following:
1.
Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel
fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.
B.
Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of
sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit
masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing
according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.
C.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy
welded.
D.
Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing
of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental
Chambers."
E.
Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.
F.
Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.
G.
Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer
complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.
H.
Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.
I.
Epoxy Intermediate Coat: Complying with MPI #77 and compatible with primer and topcoat.
J.
Polyurethane Topcoat: Complying with MPI #72 and compatible with undercoat.
K.
Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.
L.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for
interior and exterior applications.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
055213 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.4
FABRICATION
A.
Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius
of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas
on exposed surfaces.
B.
Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.
C.
Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove flux immediately.
At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness
shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.
D.
Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with
concealed internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard system
of sleeve and socket fittings.
E.
Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.
Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.
F.
Form changes in direction by bending or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings.
G.
Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling or otherwise deforming
exposed surfaces.
H.
Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.
I.
Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated.
J.
Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.5
At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crushresistant fillers to transfer loads through wall finishes.
STEEL AND IRON FINISHES
A.
Galvanized Railings:
1.
2.
3.
Hot-dip galvanize exterior steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.
Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.
Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.
B.
Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings of
grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.
C.
Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise
indicated. Refer to Section 099113 Exterior Painting for paint system.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
055213 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.
Color: Refer to drawings
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Set railings accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines
and levels and free of rack.
1.
2.
3.
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other
means without further cutting or fitting.
Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m).
Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5
mm in 3 m).
B.
Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of steel that will be in contact with grout,
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.
C.
Anchor posts in concrete by inserting into formed or core-drilled holes and grouting annular
space, minimum 8 inches.
D.
Anchor posts to metal surfaces with oval flanges.
E.
Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction.
F.
Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces.
G.
Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Use type of
bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.
H.
Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.2
For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger
or lag bolts.
For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts.
For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between
studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.
For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set intowood backing between studs.
Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.
For steel-framed partitions, use self-tapping screws fastened to steel framing or to
concealed steel reinforcements.
For steel-framed partitions, use toggle bolts installed through flanges of steel framing or
through concealed steel reinforcements.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
055213 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.
END OF SECTION 055213
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
055213 - 5
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
A.
1.2
A.
SUMMARY
Section Includes:
1.
Wood blocking and nailers.
2.
Plywood backing panels.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.
1.
2.
Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment
manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with
requirements
Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer
and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
A.
WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading
agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any ruleswriting agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an
agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the
rules indicated.
1.
2.
Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.
Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation
reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project.
1.
Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable
design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those
indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical
data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive
testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
061000 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.2
A.
WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER
Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for
interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior
construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in
contact with the ground.
1.
Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and
containing no arsenic or chromium.
B.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not
use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated
material.
C.
Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the
ALSC Board of Review.
D.
Application: Treat all rough carpentry unless otherwise indicated.
2.3
FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS
A.
General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying
with requirements in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
and with fire-test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical
products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency.
B.
Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a
flame spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no
evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional
20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond
the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.
1.
Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or
less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use
where exterior type is not indicated.
C.
Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent.
D.
Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified
testing agency.
E.
Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1.
Plywood backing panels.
2.4
A.
MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment
of other construction, including the following:
1.
2.
Blocking.
Nailers.
ROUGH CARPENTRY
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
061000 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
B.
2.5
A.
2.6
A.
For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any
species.
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1,, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated
or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness.
FASTENERS
General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this article for material and manufacture.
1.
Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressurepreservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with
hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M of Type 304 stainless
steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut,
and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for
accurate fit. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements
for attaching other construction.
B.
Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of
testing agency exposed to view.
C.
Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservativetreated lumber.
D.
Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install
continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
END OF SECTION 061000
ROUGH CARPENTRY
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
061000 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Plastic-laminate cabinets.
Plastic-laminate countertops.
Solid-surfacing-material for window stools.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale
details, attachment devices, and other components.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Samples for Verification: For the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.4
Show details full size.
Cut sheets for all hardware and accessories.
Include load ratings for drawer slides.
Plastic-laminate-clad panel products for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish.
PVC edge molding.
Solid-surfacing materials.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products
similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful inservice performance.
B.
Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.
C.
Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork
Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction,
finishes, installation, and other requirements.
D.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in
Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."
E.
Sole Source Responsibility: Arrange for a single firm to assume undivided responsibility for
woodwork, including fabrication, finishing and installation.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
064023 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in
"Project Conditions" Article.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
B.
Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress
to avoid delaying the Work.
1.
1.7
Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field
measurements before being enclosed.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be
supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each
type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Wood Products: Comply with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Hardboard: AHA A135.4.
Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD-Exterior Glue.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2-Exterior Glue.
Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Medium Density Overlay.
Hardwood Plywood and Face Veneers: HPVA HP-1.
C.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated, or if not indicated, as
required by woodwork quality standard.
D.
Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with
thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1.
1.
Provide PVC or polyester edge banding complying with LMA EDG-1 on components with
exposed or semiexposed edges.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
064023 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
E.
Solid-Surfacing Material:
ISSFA-2.
1.
2.
Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with
Type: Standard type, unless Special Purpose type is indicated.
Colors and Patterns: According to finish schedule
F.
Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.
G.
Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate at Wet Areas: Urea-formaldehyde.
2.2
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less
than 15 percent moisture content.
B.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face
of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or
lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
2.3
CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural
cabinets, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."
B.
Hardware Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.9 for items indicated by referencing BHMA
numbers or items referenced to this standard.
C.
Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type):
opening, self-closing.
D.
Back-Mounted Pulls: BHMA A156.9, B02011.
E.
Wire Pulls: Back mounted, 4 inches long, 5/16 inches in diameter; brushed aluminum finish.
F.
Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141.
G.
Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081; or
hole/pin system in accordance with AWI Standards.
H.
Countertop Support Bracket: Provide at all countertops that cannot be supported by casework;
480 mm bracket capable of supporting 500 kg per pair; prime finish. Provide Hebgo Table
Bracket #287.45.468 by Hafele or Architect approved equivalent by Knape & Vogt, Grass, or
Stanley.
I.
Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, over travel extension (1” past full extension), zinc-plated steel
drawer slides with steel ball bearings, BHMA A156.9, B05091, and rated for the following loads:
1.
2.
3.
BHMA A156.9, B01602, 120 degrees of
Box Drawer Slides: 100 lbf.
File Drawer Slides: 200 lbf.
Pencil Drawer Slides: 45 lbf.
J.
Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
064023 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
K.
Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.
L.
Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 3-inch OD, color to match countertop,
molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage.
M.
Wire Managers for Knee Spaces: 3 by 3 by 5/8-inch, molded-plastic channels for wire passage;
black color. Provide in lengths that are at least 2 inches shorter than knee space.
1.
N.
Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.
1.
O.
2.4
Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "WM9/MF-4" by Doug
Mockett & Company, Inc.
Brushed aluminum.
For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product
class requirements in BHMA A156.9.
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
2.5
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure
anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face
of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or
lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
Interior Woodwork Grade: Provide Custom grade interior woodwork complying with the
referenced quality standard.
B.
Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood
moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation
areas.
C.
Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
indicated for the following:
1.
2.
3.
Ease edges to radius
Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or
Less: 1/16 inch.
Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch.
Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch.
D.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum
extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary
for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for
scribing, trimming, and fitting.
E.
Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts
to remove splinters and burrs.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
064023 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.
2.6
Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS
A.
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for laminate cabinets; modified
Custom Grade, balanced construction.
B.
AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.
C.
Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with
the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: HGS.
Postformed Surfaces: HGP.
Vertical Surfaces: VGS.
Edges: HGS or PVC molding matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish. Provide
minimum 1 mm PVC at door and drawer edges.
D.
Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative
laminate, Grade BKL.
E.
Core Material: ¾-inch MDF, with cabinet liner on inside.
F.
Materials for Shelves: Thermoset decorative overlay, with .5 mm PVC edge band.
G.
Provide base cabinets with separate toe kick frame (floating toe kick).
H.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.7
Colors as indicated on Drawings.
PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS
A.
Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for high-pressure decorative
laminate countertops; Custom Grade.
B.
High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.
C.
Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures
of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:
1.
Colors as indicated on Drawings.
D.
Edge Treatment: 3 mm PVC molding.
E.
Core Material: Medium-density fiberboard.
F.
Core Material at Sinks: Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
064023 - 5
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.8
SOLID-SURFACING-MATERIAL FOR WINDOW STOOLS
A.
Grade: Custom.
B.
Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 1/2 inch with bull nose edge.
2.9
SHOP PRIMING
A.
Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat for items specified to be field finished with opaque
finish. Refer to Division 09 painting Sections for material and application requirements.
B.
Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.
1.
Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain
surfaces.
Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require
backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative
panels.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation
areas.
B.
Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for
fabrication of type of woodwork involved.
B.
Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.
Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.
C.
Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish
at cuts.
D.
Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use
fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with
woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.
E.
Solid Surface Window Stools: Install solid surface window stools and apron in one-piece.
Scribe and adjust to fit. Set in silicone adhesive caulk.
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
064023 - 6
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
F.
Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide
unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.
1.
2.
G.
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other
supports into underside of countertop.
1.
2.
3.
H.
Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from
a straight line.
Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive.
Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section
"Joint Sealants."
Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use
pieces less than 60 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are
necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a
straight line.
Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16
inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal
framing behind wall finish.
Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and
finish same as wood base if finished.
Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch
in 96 inches.
Refer to Division 09 Sections for final finishing of installed standing and running trim.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
B.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.
C.
Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to
restore damaged or soiled areas.
3.4
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed woodwork and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the manufacturer
and installer that ensures that woodwork is without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 064023
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
064023 - 7
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 066400 - PLASTIC PANELING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes plastic sheet paneling.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For plastic paneling and trim accessories.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Testing Agency: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PLASTIC SHEET PANELING
A.
Glass-Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Paneling: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber-reinforced plastic panels
complying with ASTM D 5319.
B.
Manufacturers:
following
2.
a.
Kemlite Company Inc.
b.
Marlite.
c.
Nudo Products, Inc
Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows when tested by a qualified testing agency
according to ASTM E 84. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
a.
b.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.
Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.
Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch (2.3 mm).
Surface Finish: Smooth.
Color: As indicated on Interior Finish Material Legend..
ACCESSORIES
A.
Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and
cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as
needed to conceal edges.
PLASTIC PANELING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
066400 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.
Color: Match panels.
B.
Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and with a VOC content of 50 g/L
or less.
C.
Sealant: Mildew-resistant, single-component, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by
plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint
Sealants."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair adhesive bond, including oil, grease, dirt, and
dust.
B.
Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to
manufacturer's written recommendations.
C.
Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints so that trimmed panels at corners are not
less than 12 inches (300 mm) wide.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.
C.
Install trim accessories with adhesive.
D.
Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels, and bed inside corner trim
in a bead of sealant.
E.
Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.
F.
Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended
by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains.
END OF SECTION 066400
PLASTIC PANELING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
066400 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Glass-fiber batt insulation.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and
smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for
combustion characteristics.
1.
C.
CertainTeed Corporation.
Johns Manville; a Berkshire Hathaway company.
Owens Corning.
Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved
assembly.
Reinforced-Foil-Faced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type III (reflective faced),
Class A (faced surface with a flame-spread index of 25 or less); Category 1 (membrane is a
vapor barrier), faced with foil scrim, foil-scrim kraft, or foil-scrim polyethylene.
1.
Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved
assembly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and
applications indicated.
B.
Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,
rain, or snow at any time.
THERMAL INSULATION
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
072100 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
C.
Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions
and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
D.
Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness
indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.
3.2
INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION
A.
Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
B.
Glass-Fiber insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following
requirements:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If
more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a
snug fit between ends.
Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.
Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not
rated for or protected from contact with insulation.
For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm),
support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of
insulation to flanges of metal studs.
Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and
seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.
a.
b.
C.
Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward as indicated on Drawings.
Interior Walls: Set units with facing placed as indicated on Drawings.
Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required
to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:
1.
Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume
equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).
END OF SECTION 072100
THERMAL INSULATION
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
072100 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Mechanically fastened thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing system.
2.
Roof insulation.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing
and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
1.4
Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
C.
Samples for Verification: For the following products:
1.
2.
1.5
Sheet roofing, of color required.
Walkway pads or rolls, of color required.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES.
B.
Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing
system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive
manufacturer's special warranty.
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
075423 - 1
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
4/9/14
2001-1112.92
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
2.2
Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.
Firestone Building Products.
GAF Materials Corporation.
GenFlex Roofing Systems.
Johns Manville.
Mule-Hide Products Co., Inc.
Versico Incorporated.
Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation and fasteners for roofing
system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by membrane
roofing manufacturer.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested
according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.
B.
Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to
ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.
A.
Roofing System Design: Tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the uplift pressures
required according to the authority having jurisdiction requirements and building conditions.
B.
Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes
indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of
applicable testing agency.
C.
Roof Reflectance and Emittance: Initial solar reflectance of 0.70 in accordance with ASTM C
1549, ASTM E 903, or ASTM E 1918. Initial thermal emittance of 0.75 in accordance with
ASTM C 1371 or ASTM E 408
2.3
TPO ROOFING
A.
Fabric-Reinforced TPO Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric- or scrim-reinforced, uniform,
flexible TPO sheet.
1.
Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm), nominal.
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
075423 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.
2.4
Exposed Face Color: White.
AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS
A.
General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use
and compatible with roofing.
1.
Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced TPO sheet flashing, 55 mils (1.4 mm)
thick, minimum, of same color as TPO sheet.
C.
Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard.
D.
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing to substrate, and
acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
E.
Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide metal termination bars, metal battens, pourable sealers,
preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings,
T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.
2.5
ROOF INSULATION
A.
Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber
mat facer on both major surfaces.
B.
Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per
12 inches (1:48) unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where
indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.
2.6
INSULATION ACCESSORIES
A.
2.7
Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate, and
acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.
WALKWAYS
A.
Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured
walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch (5 mm) thick and acceptable to roofing system
manufacturer.
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
075423 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION FOR REROOFING
A.
Where applicable, prepare existing roofs for full roof tear off or re-cover.
1.
Full Roof Tear-Off: Remove existing roofing and other roofing system components down
to the deck.
2.
Partial Roof Tear-Off: Remove existing roofing and immediately check for presence of
moisture by visually observing substrate that is to remain.
B.
Remove existing base flashings. Clean substrates of contaminants, such as asphalt, sheet
materials, dirt, and debris.
C.
Do not damage metal counterflashings that are to remain. Replace metal counterflashings
damaged during removal with counterflashings of same metal, weight or thickness, and finish.
D.
Remove existing roof top equipment, roof curbs and roof penetrations not identified for reuse.
Provide infill of roof deck openings with materials and attachment to match existing roof deck.
3.2
ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from
entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is
forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
C.
Install roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain weathertightness of
transition.
3.3
INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or
left exposed at the end of the workday.
B.
Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.
C.
Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation
thickness is 2.7 inches (68 mm) or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each
succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in
each direction.
D.
Install continuous insulation over interior spaces to an average or overall thickness to provide
R-20 minimum thermal resistance or as required to comply with local applicable energy
codes whichever is greater.
E.
Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using
mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof
insulation to deck type.
1.
Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
075423 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
3.4
MECHANICALLY FASTENED ROOFING INSTALLATION
A.
Mechanically fasten roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing and allow to relax before retaining.
B.
Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions
required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.
C.
Mechanically fasten or adhere roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of
roofing.
D.
Apply roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.
E.
In-Seam Attachment: Secure one edge of TPO sheet using fastening plates or metal battens
centered within seam, and mechanically fasten TPO sheet to roof deck.
F.
Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing and
sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure a watertight seam
installation.
1.
2.
3.
G.
3.5
Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut
edges of sheet.
Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas.
Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with requirements.
Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in place with
clamping ring.
BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according
to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow
to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.
C.
Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet
flashing.
D.
Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side
and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.
E.
Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through
termination bars.
3.6
WALKWAY INSTALLATION
A.
Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or
adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system
manufacturer's written instructions.
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
075423 - 5
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
3.7
PROTECTING AND CLEANING
A.
Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When
remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and
damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.
B.
Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair
substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration
at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.
C.
Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.
END OF SECTION 075423
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
075423 - 6
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section Includes:
1.
Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications.
2.
Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.
3.
Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.
PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS
A.
1.3
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.5
Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing
and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful
in-service performance.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal
flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified
warranty period.
1.
Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural
movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed
sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.
B.
Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual"
and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles
shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
076200 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
C.
SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install copings tested according to SPRI ES-1
and capable of resisting the following design pressure:
1.
D.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature
changes.
1.
2.2
Design Pressure: As indicated on Drawings.
Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
SHEET METALS
A.
General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying
strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.
B.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel
sheet according to ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 (Class AZM150) coating designation,
Grade 40 (Grade 275); prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.
1.
Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:
a.
2.
2.3
Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than
70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply
coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'
written instructions.
Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS
A.
Synthetic Underlayment: Laminated or reinforced, woven polyethylene or polypropylene,
synthetic roofing underlayment; bitumen free; slip resistant; suitable for high temperatures over
220 deg F (111 deg C); and complying with physical requirements of ASTM D 226/D 226M for
Type I and Type II felts.
B.
Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils (0.76 mm) thick, consisting of a slipresistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBSmodified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high
metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written
recommendations of underlayment manufacturer.
1.
2.
2.4
Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C) or higher.
Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29
deg C) or lower.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants, and
other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation
and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless
otherwise indicated.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
076200 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
B.
Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by
manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.
1.
General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.
a.
2.
Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or
factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers
under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.
b.
Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal
being fastened.
c.
Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching
internal gutter width.
Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.
C.
Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, polyisobutylene compound sealant tape
with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2
inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.
D.
Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; of type, grade,
class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain
watertight.
E.
Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited
movement.
F.
Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.
2.5
FABRICATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and
recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,
metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and
trim in shop to greatest extent possible.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.
Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,
buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded
back to form hems.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed
fasteners on faces exposed to view.
Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.
1.
2.
Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm)
deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.
Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.
C.
Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide
for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.
D.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or
from compatible, noncorrosive metal.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
076200 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
E.
Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal
standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.
F.
Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended
use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.
2.6
ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section required, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes,
and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections.
Furnish flat-stock gutter brackets and gutter spacers and straps fabricated from same metal as
gutters, of size recommended by cited sheet metal standard but with thickness not less than
twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, and gutter
accessories from same metal as gutters. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.
1.
Fabricate from the following materials:
a.
Galvanized Steel: 24 Ga.
B.
Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with mitered
elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and anchors. Shop
fabricate elbows.
1.
2.
Hanger Style: Brackets at 4’-0” o.c..
Fabricate from the following materials:
a.
Galvanized Steel: 24 Ga.
C.
Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers to dimensions required, with closure flange trim to
exterior, 4-inch- (100-mm-) wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches (100 mm)
beyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
Aluminum: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) thick.
D.
Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge and of
dimensions and shape required, complete with outlet tubes. Fabricate from the following
materials:
1.
Fabricate from the following materials:
a.
Galvanized Steel: 24 Ga.
2.7
LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Roof Edge Flashing (Gravel Stop or flush drainage edge)) and Fascia Cap: Fabricate in
minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-) long sections. Furnish
with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide, joint cover plates. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.
1.
Fabricate from the following materials:
a.
Galvanized Steel: 24 Ga.
B.
Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-)
long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous
cleats to support edge of external leg and interior leg. Miter corners, fasten and seal watertight.
Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.
1.
Fabricate from the following materials:
a.
Galvanized Steel: 24 Ga.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
076200 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
C.
Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners. Fabricate from the following
materials:
1.
Fabricate from the following materials:
a.
Galvanized Steel: 24 Ga.
D.
Counterflashing and Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
Fabricate from the following materials:
a.
Galvanized Steel: 24 Ga.
E.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
Fabricate from the following materials:
a.
Galvanized Steel: 24 Ga.
2.8
WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, and similar flashings to extend
4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch- (50-mm-)
high dams. Fabricate from the following materials:
1.
Fabricate from the following materials:
a.
Galvanized Steel: 24 Ga.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment, wrinkle free, using adhesive to minimize use of
mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed
water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).
B.
Synthetic Underlayment: Install synthetic underlayment, wrinkle free, according to
manufacturers' written instructions, and using adhesive where possible to minimize use of
mechanical fasteners under sheet metal.
C.
Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free.
Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature
restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment
at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6
inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less
than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective
coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet
metal flashing and trim system.
1.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat
seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
076200 - 5
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating
sheet metal.
Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Attach each cleat with at least two
fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.
Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling
and tool marks.
Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.
B.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts
pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent
separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.
1.
Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or
wood substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.
C.
Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space
movement joints at maximum of 12 feet, with no joints within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or
intersection.
1.
Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm)
deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.
D.
Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4
inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws.
E.
Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to
minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight
installation.
F.
Rivets: Rivet joints in uncoated aluminum where necessary for strength.
3.3
ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage system
according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate installation of
roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.
B.
Hanging Gutters: Join sections with joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion.
Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchor them in position. Provide end closures and seal
watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.
1.
Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, 50 feet
(15.24 m) apart. Install expansion-joint caps.
C.
Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provide hangers with
fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and
at approximately 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c.
D.
Parapet Scuppers: Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges to
interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane.
E.
Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall, with elevation of conductor head rim at minimum of
1 inch (25 mm) below scupper discharge.
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
076200 - 6
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
F.
3.4
Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration
indicated. Lap joints minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) in direction of water flow.
ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and
cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to
line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight
and weather resistant.
B.
Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in
cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge
flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate.
C.
Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet
metal standard unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top
edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base
flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.
E.
Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.
Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend
counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4
inches (100 mm).
F.
Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of
roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp counterflashing to pipes that penetrate roof.
3.5
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and
weathering.
B.
Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.
C.
Clean off excess sealants.
D.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
END OF SECTION 076200
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
076200 - 7
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes hollow-metal work.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.3
Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMMHMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses,
preparations for hardware, and other details
C.
Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for
details and openings as those on Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company.
2.
Republic Doors and Frames.
3.
Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based
on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.
1.
Smoke- and Draft-Control Assemblies: Provide an assembly with gaskets listed and
labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, based on testing according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance
with NFPA 105.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
081113 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.3
INTERIOR DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2.
1.
2.
Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.
Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Frames:
a.
b.
4.
2.4
Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm).
Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0
mm).
Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.
Core: Manufacturer's standard.
Materials: Uncoated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm).
Construction: Knocked down.
Exposed Finish: Prime.
EXTERIOR HOLLOW-METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
A.
Extra-Heavy-Duty Doors and Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3..
1.
2.
Physical Performance: Level A according to SDI A250.4.
Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
4.
Thermal-Rated Doors: Provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value)
of not less than R-2.7 (U-0.37) when tested according to ASTM C 1363.
Frames:
a.
b.
5.
2.5
Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule.
Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm).
Face: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), with
minimum A40 (ZF120) coating.
Edge Construction: Model 2, Seamless.
Core: Polyurethane.
Materials: Metallic-coated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm),
with minimum A40 (ZF120) coating.
Construction: Full profile welded.
Exposed Finish: Prime.
FRAME ANCHORS
A.
Jamb Anchors:
1.
Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not
less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2
inches (51 mm) wide by 10 inches (254 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177
inch (4.5 mm) thick.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
081113 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0
mm), and as follows:
1.
2.
2.6
Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042
inch (1.0 mm) thick.
Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors.
Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to
wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.
Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.
Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,
allowing not less than 2-inch (51-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at
finish floor surface.
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for
exposed applications.
B.
Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale,
pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.
C.
Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
D.
Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z (12G) coating designation;
mill phosphatized.
1.
For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M
or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M,
Class B.
E.
Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.
F.
Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: From corrosion-resistant materials.
G.
Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured
according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.
H.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).
I.
Glazing: Section 088000 "Glazing."
J.
Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, compounded for 15-mil (0.4-mm) dry film
thickness per coat.
2.7
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form
metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical,
fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site,
clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
081113 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
B.
Hollow-Metal Doors:
1.
2.
C.
Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottoms of exterior doors to permit
moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.
Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by
NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated.
Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling
limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal
as frames.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints,
fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to
jambs by butt welding.
Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners
unless otherwise indicated.
Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be
grouted.
Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per
anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at
bottoms of jambs.
Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:
a.
Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 16 inches (406 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c., to match
coursing, and as follows:
1)
2)
b.
Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as
follows:
1)
2)
6.
Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.
Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.
Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised
hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to
SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.
1.
2.
E.
Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers.
a.
b.
D.
Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high.
Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted
door hardware.
Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation
of hollow-metal work for hardware.
Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites and louvers where
indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
081113 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.8
Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollowmetal work.
Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each
glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.
Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors
and frames.
Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal work.
Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation
types indicated.
STEEL FINISHES
A.
Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.
1.
2.9
Shop Primer: SDI A250.10.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Louvers: Provide louvers for interior doors, where indicated, which comply with SDI 111C, with
blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch- (0.5-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032inch- (0.8-mm-) thick steel frame.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with
SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.
1.
Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent
anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving
surfaces smooth and undamaged.
a.
b.
c.
2.
At fire-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.
Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been
properly set and secured.
Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as
necessary to comply with installation tolerances.
Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and
secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.
a.
3.
4.
Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled
expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.
In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled
expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible
on exposed faces.
Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment,
twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
081113 - 5
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
a.
b.
c.
d.
B.
Hollow-Metal Doors: Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified
below. Shim as necessary.
1.
Non-Fire-Rated Steel Doors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
C.
Between Door and Frame Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or minus 1/32
inch (0.8 mm).
Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) to 1/4 inch (6.3 mm) plus or
minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
At Bottom of Door: 5/8 inch (15.8 mm) plus or minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
Between Door Face and Stop: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) plus or
minus 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).
Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.
Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollowmetal manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
3.2
Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line
90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.
Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal
line parallel to plane of wall.
Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of
jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.
Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.
Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not
more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (51 mm) o.c. from each
corner.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final
inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace
defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.
B.
Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of
prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.
C.
Metallic-Coated Surface Touchup: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in
painting Sections.
END OF SECTION 081113
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
081113 - 6
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.2
Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.
Factory finishing flush wood doors.
Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
Service gates.
Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include factory-finishing specifications.
B.
Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and
other pertinent data.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
1.3
Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.
Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.
Indicate requirements for veneer matching.
Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.
Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.
Samples: For verification shall be actual wood door veneer.
WARRANTY
A.
1.4
Manufacturers standard lifetime.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural
Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."
B.
Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at according to
NFPA 252.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
081416 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
Chappell Door Co.
Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company.
VT Architectural Wood Doors
DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL
A.
WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade:
1.
B.
Particleboard-Core Doors:
1.
2.
C.
Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1.
Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate
through-bolting hardware.
Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fireprotection rating indicated.
1.
2.
D.
Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.
Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by
outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated
with formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals.
Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.
Hollow-Core Doors:
Construction: Institutional hollow core. (Gates only)
2.3
VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH
A.
Interior Solid-Core Doors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Grade: Custom (Grade A faces).
Species: Select white birch.
Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced).
Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.
Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match.
Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by
mullions.
Core: Particleboard.
Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive
planed before veneering.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
081416 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
9.
B.
Interior Hollow-Core Doors:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.4
Adhesives: Type 1 per WDMA TM-6
Grade: Custom (Grade A faces).
Species: Select white birch.
Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced).
Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match.
Construction: Seven plies.
LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES
A.
Metal Louvers:
1.
B.
2.5
Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, factory primed for
paint finish.
Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard woodveneered noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use
in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required
for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated.
FABRICATION
A.
Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of
referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.
1.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
B.
Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.
C.
Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.
1.
2.
3.
2.6
Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.
Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with
applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."
Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.
FACTORY FINISHING
A.
General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication,
including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied,
before finishing.
B.
Finish doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish.
indicated to receive opaque finish.
C.
Transparent Finish:
1.
2.
Field finish doors
Grade: Premium.
Finish: WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
081416 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
3.
Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
4.
Sheen: Satin.
SERVICE GATE
2.7
A.
Service Gate: Gate and Post System; 3/4 inch (19 mm) exterior grade solid wood core;
1 inch (25 mm) total thickness.
1.
Acceptable Manufacturer: Eliason Corporation; P.O. Box 2128, Kalamazoo, MI
49003.ASD.
Tel:
Tel:
(800)
828-3655.
Fax:
(800)
828-3577.
Email:
[email protected] www.eliasoncorp.com.
2.
No substitutes
3.
Facing: Decorative plastic laminate.
a.
a. Cafe Length Panels: 0.032 inch (0.81 mm) decorative laminate, both sides.
b.
b. Edge Trim: Black edge banding.
4.
Application: Cafe doors. (Model SCP-GATE)
5.
Contours: None.
B.
HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES
1.
A. Hinges: Double Action Easy Swing(r) proprietary hinges.
a.
1. Finish: Zinc coated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
B.
Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the
referenced quality standard, and as indicated.
1.
C.
Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.
Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels; do not trim
stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine
doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and
machining.
1.
Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.
Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering
unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch
(6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.
a.
D.
3.2
Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.
Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at
Project site.
ADJUSTING
A.
Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
081416 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
B.
Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors
may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of
repair or refinishing.
END OF SECTION 081416
FLUSH WOOD DOORS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
081416 - 5
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Exterior and interior storefront framing.
Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors and door frame units.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following
performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:
1.
2.
3.
Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,
story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.
Failure includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Deflection exceeding specified limits.
Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and
structural movements to glazing.
Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements.
Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
Failure of operating units.
B.
Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
C.
Deflection of Framing Members:
1.
Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6
inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than
13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing
lites to 3/4 inch (19 mm), whichever is less.
D.
Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed
glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to
ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft.
E.
Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not
evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to
ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load
design pressure, but not less than 10 PSF.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
084113 4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work.
1.4
1.
Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of
moisture in the system to the exterior.
2.
Include entrance doors and hardware sets.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Warranties: Sample of special warranties.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved
for installation of units required for this Project.
B.
Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop
Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in
systems similar to those indicated for this Project.
C.
Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC/ANSI A117.1.
D.
Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems:
manufacturer.
1.6
Obtain from single source from single
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1.
B.
Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair
or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal
weathering.
1.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
084113 4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by
testing of aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this
Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in
construction.
1.
2.
Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting
structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term
creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.
Failure also includes the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
Structural Loads:
1.
2.
C.
Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.
Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:
1.
2.
D.
Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.
Glass breakage.
Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.
Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.
Failure of operating units.
Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to
glass plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite
or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19.1
mm), whichever is less.
Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm),
whichever is smaller.
Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:
1.
2.
3.
When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.
When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,
assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or
permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.
Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.
A.
Energy Performance: Refer to drawing G002 for prescriptive energy efficiency code
requirements.
B.
Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface
temperature changes:
1.
Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material
surfaces.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
084113 4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
EFCO Corporation (Basis of Design):
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.3
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Exterior Storefront: Thermal Flush-Glazed Shear Block Storefront.
Interior Storefront for single pane clear tempered and acid etched glass: System
403 NT Flush-Glazed Shear Block Storefront or approved equal.
Entrances: Series D300 Medium Stile Entrance Door.
Arcadia, Inc.
Arch Aluminum & Glass Co., Inc.
Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company.
United States Aluminum.
Oldcastle Building Envelope
YKK AP America Inc.
MATERIALS
A.
Aluminum:
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M).
Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M).
Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.
Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.
Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.
Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying
with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and
pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPCSP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish
Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.
Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.
Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.
FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness
required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.
1.
Construction: Thermally broken for exterior storefront. Framing members are composite
assemblies of two separate extruded-aluminum components permanently bonded by an
elastomeric material of low thermal conductance.
2.
Exterior Framing – match existing adjacent framing system for profile, color, sealant, etc.
3.
4.
5.
Interior Framing – members to be EFCO 403 NT or equal.
Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.
Glazing Plane: Center.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
084113 4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
B.
Brackets and Reinforcements:
Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.
C.
Fasteners and Accessories:
Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.
1.
2.
3.
Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.
Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.
Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing
system.
D.
Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts,
complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.
E.
Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding
flashing compatible with adjacent materials.
F.
Framing System Gaskets and Sealants:
manufacturer for joint type.
2.5
Manufacturer's standard, recommended by
GLAZING SYSTEMS
A.
Glazing: As specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."
B.
Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or
extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
C.
Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.
2.6
ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS
A.
Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.
1.
Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch(3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten
corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that
incorporate concealed tie rods.
2.
Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch (127-mm) nominal width.
a.
3.
Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches (255
mm) above floor or ground plane.
Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed
gaskets.
a.
Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
084113 4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.7
ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE
A.
General: Provide entrance door hardware for each entrance door to comply with requirements
in this Section.
1.
2.
Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and
products complying with BHMA standard referenced.
Opening-Force Requirements:
a.
b.
Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch and not more than
30 lbf (133 N)to set the door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open the
door to its minimum required width.
Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) to fully open door.
B.
Opening-Force Requirements:
1.
Latches and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) required to release latch.
C.
Pivot Hinges: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.
1.
D.
Offset-Pivot Hinges: Provide top, bottom, and intermediate offset pivots at each door
leaf.
Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner.
1.
2.
3.
Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove
in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed.
Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin.
Quantities:
a.
b.
For doors up to 87 inches (2210 mm) high, provide 3 hinges per leaf.
For doors more than 87 and up to 120 inches (2210 and up to 3048 mm) high,
provide 4 hinges per leaf.
E.
Mortise Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.
F.
Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing
according to UL 305.
G.
Cylinders: As specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."
H.
Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for
aluminum framing.
I.
Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.
J.
Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3, extruded aluminum.
1.
K.
When used with panic exit devices, provide removable mullions listed and labeled by a
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic
protection, based on testing according to UL 305. Use only mullions that have been
tested with exit devices to be used.
Surface-Mounted Overhead Closers: Modern type with cover, for hinge side installation. Comply
with ANSI A156.4, Grade 1. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for closer size,
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
084113 4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
depending on door size, exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. Include the
following:
1.
2.
Hold-open arm.
Delayed-action closing.
L.
Door Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1, floor or wall mounted, as appropriate for door location
indicated, with integral rubber bumper.
M.
Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.
N.
Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed
fasteners on mounting strip.
O.
Silencers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.
P.
Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with
maximum height of 1/2 inch (13 mm).
Q.
Push-Pull Plates: Aluminum push-pull plates of style indicated.
R.
Pull Handles: Aluminum pull handles of style indicated.
S.
Push Bars: Manufacturer's standard full-door-width single-bar push bar.
T.
Thresholds: Extruded aluminum threshold of size and design indicated in mill finish, complete with
anchors and clips, coordinated with pivots and closers.
U.
All exterior doors shall have panic hardware unless noted otherwise.
V.
Refer to notes on Drawings for specific hardware requirements.
2.8
ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A.
Bituminous Paint:
Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12
requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per
coat.
B.
Joint sealants as recommended by manufacturer.
2.9
FABRICATION
A.
Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.
B.
Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of
finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or
grinding.
C.
Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following
characteristics:
1.
2.
Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.
Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
084113 4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture
migrating within the system to exterior.
Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.
Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to
maintain required glazing edge clearances.
Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest
extent possible.
D.
Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.
E.
Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and
for installing entrance door hardware.
F.
Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.
G.
Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest
extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying
finishes.
H.
After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop
Drawings.
2.10
ALUMINUM FINISHES
A.
Interior Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.
B.
Exterior: Match existing
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Metal Protection:
1.
2.
C.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
Do not install damaged components.
Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.
Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.
Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic
deterioration.
Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.
Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting
contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive
spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.
Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.
Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
084113 4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
D.
Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200
"Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.
E.
Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without
warp or rack.
F.
Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."
G.
Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.
1.
2.
3.2
Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather
stripping.
Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware:
Install surface-mounted entrance door
hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using
concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
ADJUSTING
A.
Entrances:
Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation according to hardware
manufacturers' written instructions.
1.
For doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second
closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches from
the latch measured to the leading door edge.
END OF SECTION 084113
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
084113 4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes:
1.
Mechanical door hardware for the following:
a.
2.
3.
B.
Cylinders for door hardware specified in other Sections.
Electrified door hardware.
Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the products listed below.
Coordinating and scheduling the purchase and delivery of these products remain requirements
of this Section.
1.
1.2
Swinging doors.
Pivots thresholds weather stripping and lock cylinders to be installed under other
Sections.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware.
C.
Other Action Submittals:
1.
Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing
fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as installation procedures and
diagrams. Coordinate final door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work
to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
a.
b.
c.
Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers
as in the Contract Documents.
Content: Include the following information:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each
door and frame.
Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor
plans and to door and frame schedule.
Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style,
function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product.
Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and
interfaces with other building control systems.
DOOR HARDWARE
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
087100 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.3
2.
Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date,
particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of
other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data,
Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information
essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.
3.
Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's
final keying instructions for locks.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved
by product manufacturers and an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the
course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and
keying.
B.
Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing
consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and
extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as follows:
1.
For door hardware, an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) .
C.
Source Limitations: Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical
door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications
and that are listed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction are acceptable.
D.
Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated, provide door
hardware rated for use in assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive
pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke- and draft-control door assemblies
are required, provide door hardware that meet requirements of assemblies tested according to
UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105.
1.
Air Leakage Rate: Maximum air leakage of0.3 cfm/sq. ft. (3 cu. m per minute/sq. m) at
the tested pressure differential of 0.3-inch wg (75 Pa) of water.
F.
Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing
agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
G.
Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch.
Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation.
H.
Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with
ICC/ANSI A117.1.
1.
2.
Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the
wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N).
Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:
a.
Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors:
door.
DOOR HARDWARE
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to
087100 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
b.
c.
3.
4.
1.4
Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch.
Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.
Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more
than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.
Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door
will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured
to the leading edge of the door.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.5
Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise
indicated.
a.
Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A.
General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section.
1.
2.
2.2
Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products
equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products.
Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of
operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.
HINGES AND PIVOTS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Hinges:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Hager Companies.
McKinney Products Company; Div. of ESSEX Industries, Inc.
Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works.
Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless
steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following:
1.
2.
Number of Pins: Six.
Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam.
DOOR HARDWARE
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
087100 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
C.
Permanent Cores: Manufacturer's standard; finish face to match lockset; complying with the
following:
1.
2.
Interchangeable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key.
Removable Cores: Core insert, removable by use of a special key, and for use with only
the core manufacturer's cylinder and door hardware.
D.
Keying System: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a factory-registered keying system
complying with the following requirements:
1.
Grand Master Key System: Change keys, a master key, and a grand master key operate
cylinders.
E.
Keys: Provide nickel-silver keys complying with the following:
1.
Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include
the following notation:
a.
2.
Quantity: In addition to one extra blank key for each lock, provide the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.3
Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE."
Cylinder Change Keys: Three.
Master Keys: Five.
Grand Master Keys: Five.
EXIT DEVICES
A.
Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.
B.
Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating devices
are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural &
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA),
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."
1.
Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the
wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf (22 N).
C.
Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not require
more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool, or
special knowledge for operation.
D.
Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.
E.
Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection,
based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.
F.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
LCN.
Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
DOOR HARDWARE
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
087100 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.4
PUSH/PULL UNITS
A.
Standard: BHMA A156.6.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
2.5
Baldwin.
IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).
PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS
A.
Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screws.
B.
Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from material
indicated in door hardware sets.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
2.6
Baldwin Hardware Corporation.
IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company.
Trimco.
STRIKES
A.
2.7
Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with
curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise
indicated.
CLOSERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Surface-Mounted Closers:
a.
b.
c.
Dorma.
LCN.
Norton.
B.
Certified Products: Provide door closers listed in BHMA's "Directory of Certified Door Closers."
C.
Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations
for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated
frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and
requirements for opening force.
2.8
FABRICATION
A.
Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's
name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in
conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect.
1.
Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.
DOOR HARDWARE
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
087100 - 5
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
B.
Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method
indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness.
Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and
BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming
methods if different from specified standard.
C.
Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally
prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws.
Provide screws according to
commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat-head
screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed,
except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for
installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only
means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow
door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.
Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire-rated applications, unless door blocking is
provided:
a.
b.
c.
4.
5.
2.9
Mortise hinges to doors.
Strike plates to frames.
Closers to doors and frames.
Surface hinges to doors.
Closers to doors and frames.
Surface-mounted exit devices.
Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors.
Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended
Fasteners for Wood Doors."
FINISHES
A.
Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.18.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
C.
Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to
minimize contrast.
D.
BHMA Designations:
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
BHMA 619:
BHMA 626:
BHMA 627:
BHMA 628:
BHMA 630:
Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the
Satin nickel plated, clear coated, over brass or bronze base metal.
Satin chromium plated over nickel, over brass or bronze base metal.
Satin aluminum, clear coated, over aluminum base metal.
Satin aluminum, clear anodized, over aluminum base metal.
Satin stainless steel, over stainless-steel base metal.
DOOR HARDWARE
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
087100 - 6
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
6.
BHMA 652: Satin chromium plated over nickel, over steel base metal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Steel Doors and Frames: For surface applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames
according to ANSI/SDI A250.6.
B.
Wood Doors: Comply with DHI WDHS.5 "Recommended Hardware Reinforcement Locations
for Mineral Core Wood Flush Doors."
C.
Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless
otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.
1.
2.
D.
Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8.
Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for
Wood Flush Doors."
Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface
protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have
been completed on substrates involved.
1.
2.
Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.
Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.
E.
Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than
the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30
inches (750 mm) of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of
support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided.
F.
Intermediate Offset Pivots: Where offset pivots are indicated, provide intermediate offset pivots
in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule but not fewer than one intermediate offset
pivot per door and one additional intermediate offset pivot for every 30 inches (750 mm) of door
height greater than 90 inches (2286 mm).
G.
Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction
period.
1.
Replace construction cores with permanent cores as indicated in keying schedule.
H.
Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior doors and other doors indicated in full bed of sealant
complying with requirements specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."
I.
Stops: Provide floor stops for doors unless wall or other type stops are indicated in door
hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic.
J.
Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame.
DOOR HARDWARE
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
087100 - 7
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
K.
Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed.
L.
Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.
M.
Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure
proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as
intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and
ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent
Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.
END OF SECTION 087100
ATTACHMENT: HARDWARE SCHEDULE
DOOR HARDWARE
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
087100 - 8
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
HARDWARE SCHEDULE
General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door
Hardware", and in the following schedule of hardware sets.
Hardware Set #1.1- (each to have) –at interior storefront doors as marked
1 each
CYLINDER
CONVENTIONAL
Balance of Hardware - REFER TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 84113.
Function: push /pull with closer
Hardware Set #1.2- (each to have) – at exterior storefront doors as marked
1 each
CYLINDER
CONVENTIONAL
Balance of Hardware - REFER TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 84113.
Function: exit device (lock out function).
Hardware Set #1.3- (each to have) – at exterior storefront doors as marked
1 each
CYLINDER
CONVENTIONAL
Balance of Hardware - REFER TO SPECIFICATION SECTION 84113.
Function: exit device (exit only, no entry)
Hardware Set #2 - (each to have)
1 ½ pairs
1 each
1 each
3 each
1 each
HINGES
LOCKSET
DOOR STOP
SILENCERS
KICK PLATE
BB1279 4 ½ X 4 ½
CL3820NZD (privacy)
WALL - 406
650ST-T
K1050 (12” HIGH x 2” less width
of door – push side only)
US26D
626
US32D
GRAY
US32D
HAGER
CORBIN RUSSWIN
ROCKWOOD
WS
ROCKWOOD
US26D
626
US32D
GRAY
US32D
HAGER
CORBIN RUSSWIN
ROCKWOOD
WS
ROCKWOOD
US26D
626
US32D
GRAY
US32D
HAGER
CORBIN RUSSWIN
ROCKWOOD
WS
ROCKWOOD
Hardware Set #3 - (each to have) – use at gates
1 pair
1 each
1 each
3 each
1 each
HINGES
LOCKSET
DOOR STOP
SILENCERS
KICK PLATE
BB1279 4 ½ X 4 ½
CL3810NZD (passage)
WALL – 406
650ST-T
K1050 (12” HIGH x 2” less width
of door – push side only)
Hardware Set #4 - (each to have)
1 ½ pairs
1 each
1 each
3 each
1 each
HINGES
LOCKSET
DOOR STOP
SILENCERS
KICK PLATE
BB1279 4 ½ X 4 ½
CL3810NZD (passage)
WALL – 406
650ST-T
K1050 (12” HIGH x 2” less width
of door – push side only)
Hardware Set #4.2 - (each to have) provide head and foot bolt at each leaf at pairs of doors.
1 ½ pairs
1 each
1 each
3 each
1 each
HINGES
LOCKSET
DOOR STOP
SILENCERS
ARMOR PLATE
BB1279 4 ½ X 4 ½
CL3810NZD (passage)
WALL - 406
650ST-T
K1050A-6 (36” HIGH x 2” less
width of door – push side only)
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
US26D
626
US32D
GRAY
US32D
HAGER
CORBIN RUSSWIN
ROCKWOOD
WS
ROCKWOOD
84113 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
Hardware Set #5 - (each to have) at freezer door as marked provided by CSL
1 each
DOOR STOP HEAVY DUTY
WALL MOUNT #467
US32D
ASSA ABLOY
Hardware Set #6 - (each to have) provide head and foot bolt at pairs of doors, refer to plan.
1 ½ pairs
1 each
1 each
3 each
1 each
HINGES
LOCKSET
DOOR STOP
SILENCERS
KICK PLATE
BB1279 4 ½ X 4 ½
CL3857NZD (storeroom)
WALL - 406
650ST-T
K1050 (12” HIGH x 2” less width
of door – push side only)
US26D
626
US32D
GRAY
US32D
HAGER
CORBIN RUSSWIN
ROCKWOOD
WS
ROCKWOOD
Hardware Set #6.2 - (each to have)provide head and foot bolt at pairs of doors, refer to plan.
1 ½ pairs
1 each
1 each
3 each
1 each
HINGES
LOCKSET
DOOR STOP
SILENCERS
ARMOR PLATE
BB1279 4 ½ X 4 ½
CL3857NZD (storeroom)
WALL – 406
650ST-T
K1050A-6 (36” HIGH x 2” less
width of door – push side only)
US26D
626
US32D
GRAY
US32D
HAGER
CORBIN RUSSWIN
ROCKWOOD
WS
ROCKWOOD
US26D
626
US32D
GRAY
US32D
HAGER
CORBIN RUSSWIN
ROCKWOOD
WS
ROCKWOOD
BB1279 4 ½ X 4 ½
111 X 73 X 73L
US26D
US32D
HAGER
ROCKWOOD
DC3600 (sized for door)
WALL - 406
650ST-T
K1050 (12” HIGH x 2” less width
of door – push side only)
696
US32D
GRAY
US32D
CORBIN RUSSWIN
ROCKWOOD
WS
ROCKWOOD
BB1279 4 ½ X 4 ½
CO100-CYL-70-RHO-JDCO6
US26D
626
8000XMK
WALL - 406
650ST-T
K1050 (12” HIGH x 2” less width
of door – push side only)
US26D
US32D
GRAY
US32D
HAGER
SCHLAGE
ELECTRONICS
CORBIN RUSSWIN
ROCKWOOD
WS
ROCKWOOD
Hardware Set #7 - (each to have)
1 1/2 pair
1 each
1 each
3 each
1 each
HINGES
LOCKSET
DOOR STOP
SILENCERS
KICK PLATE
BB1279 4 ½ X 4 ½
CL3855NZD (classroom)
WALL - 406
650ST-T
K1050 (12” HIGH x 2” less width
of door – push side only)
Hardware Set #8- (each to have)
1 ½ pairs
1 each
1 each
1 each
3 each
1 each
HINGES
PUSH PULL
SET
CLOSER
DOOR STOP
SILENCERS
KICK PLATE
Hardware Set #9- (each to have)
1 1/2 pair
1 each
1 each
1 each
3 each
1 each
HINGES
LOCKSET
KEYPAD
CORE
DOOR STOP
SILENCERS
KICK PLATE
Hardware Set #9.1 - (each to have) provide automatic head and foot bolt at pairs of doors, refer to plan.
Provide 2 pairs hinges at 4'-0" wide door.
1 ½ pairs
HINGES
BB1279 4 ½ X 4 ½
US26D
HAGER
1 each
LOCKSET
CO100-CYL-70-RHO-JDCO6
626
SCHLAGE
KEYPAD
ELECTRONICS
84113 - 2
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
4/9/14
2001-1112.92
Novus Architects, Inc.
1 each
1 each
1 each
3 each
1 each
CORE
CLOSER
DOOR STOP
SILENCERS
ARMOR PLATE
8000XMK
DC3600 (sized for door)
WALL - 406
650ST-T
K1050A-6 (36” HIGH x 2” less
width of door – push side only)
US26D
696
US32D
GRAY
US32D
CORBIN RUSSWIN
CORBIN RUSSWIN
ROCKWOOD
WS
ROCKWOOD
Hardware Set #11- (each to have) provide head and foot bolt and closer at inactive leaf
2 pairs
1 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
HINGES
EXIT DEVICE
RIM
KEY PAD
BB1279 4 ½ X 4 ½
99EO
US26D
US26D
HAGER
VON-DUPRIN
CO-100-993-70-RHO-JDCO6
US26D
CORE
DOOR STOP
CLOSER
WEATHERSTRIP
RAINDRIP
DOOR
BOTTOM
THRESHOLD
PEEPHOLE
8000XMK
WALL - 406
DC3600 (sized for door)
303AS sized for door
US26D
US32D
696
696
SCHLAGE
ELECTRONICS
CORBIN RUSSWIN
ROCKWOOD
CORBIN RUSSWIN
PEMKO
346C X 48
18062CP
696
696
PEMKO
PEMKO
2005AT
696
PEMKO
BB1279 4 ½ X 4 ½
99EO ALK
SS PUSH BAR TRIM
US26D
US26D
HAGER
VON-DUPRIN
WALL - 406
DC3600 (sized for door)
303AS sized for door
US32D
696
696
ROCKWOOD
CORBIN RUSSWIN
PEMKO
346C X 48
18062CP
696
696
PEMKO
PEMKO
2005AT
696
PEMKO
Hardware Set #11.1- (each to have)
1 ½ pairs
1 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
1 each
HINGES
EXIT DEVICE
RIM
ALARM
DOOR STOP
CLOSER
WEATHERSTRIP
RAINDRIP
DOOR
BOTTOM
THRESHOLD
PEEPHOLE
END OF HARDWARE SCHEDULE
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
84113 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those
specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this
Section:
1.
Doors.
2.
Storefront framing.
3.
Glazed entrances.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors” .
2.
Division 08 Section “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts”.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement without
failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture,
fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight;
deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.
1.
Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,
according to the following requirements:
a.
b.
B.
1.4
Minimum Glass Thickness: Not less than 6.0 mm.
Wind loads: As indicated on drawings
Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with
16 CFR 1201, Category II.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.
B.
Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in
preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.
C.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that
products furnished comply with requirements.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
GLAZING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
088000 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
A.
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass
installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass
installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier
Certification Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).
B.
Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source
from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated.
C.
Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing
with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass,
thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.
1.
D.
Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.
1.
1.6
Provide safety glazing where indicated here and on drawings.
GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual."
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to
prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct
exposure to sun, or other causes.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.
1.
1.8
Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions
are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.
WARRANTY
A.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace
coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated
glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage
or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions.
Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.
1.
B.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace
laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of
laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass
breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written
GLAZING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
088000 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through
glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.
1.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
C.
Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace
insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating
glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass
breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written
instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior
surfaces of glass.
D.
Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion
E.
Provide written 5-year warranty from date of manufacture for PVB laminated glass. Warranty
covers deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling installing, protecting
and maintaining practices contrary to glass manufacturer’s published instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GLASS PRODUCTS
A.
Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048 (tempered); Type I (transparent flat glass); QualityQ3; of class, kind, and condition indicated.
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion
parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed, unless otherwise indicated.
Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed float glass where safety
glass is indicated or required by applicable code and for all interior locations.
Provide safety glazing labeling.
INSULATING GLASS
A.
Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by
a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other
requirements specified. Refer to drawing G002 for prescriptive energy efficiency code
requirements.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary.
Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.
Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.
Basis of design: PPG Solarban 60 for all exterior glazing.
Match color and/or clarity of existing adjacent glazing where applicable.
MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES
A.
Glass for Interior Glazing: Clear, fully tempered float glass.
1.
2.
B.
Thickness: 6.0 mm.
Provide safety glazing labeling.
Glass for interior glazing: Mirrored, one-way, fully tempered glass.
GLAZING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
088000 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
2.4
SAFETY / BURGLAR RESISTANT LAMINATED GLASS
A.
Sealed Insulating Glass (IG) Units with Two-Ply Laminated Glass Inboard Lite
B.
UL972 - Standard for Burglary Resisting Glazing Material.
C.
Insulating Glass Unit Makeup
1.
Outboard Lite
a.
Refer to insulated glass requirements
b.
Heat treated tempered.
2.
Spacer
a.
Refer to insulated glass requirements
3.
Laminated Inboard Lite
1)
Outer Ply:
a)
Glass Type:
b)
Glass Tint: None
c)
Nominal Thickness: 3/16”
d)
Glass Strength: Annealed
2)
Interlayer:
a)
Interlayer Type:PVB
b)
Interlayer Tint: None
c)
Nominal Thickness: 0.060 inch
3)
Inner Ply:
a)
Glass Type:
b)
Glass Tint: None
c)
Nominal Thickness: 3/16”
d)
Glass Strength: Annealed
2.5
GLAZING GASKETS
A.
Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to
maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864.
EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.
Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.
Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.
Soft Compression Gaskets:
Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets
complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain
watertight seal.
1.
2.6
Pilkington Mirrorpane, no substitutes.
Thickness: 6.0 mm.
Provide safety glazing labeling.
Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense
compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of
pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.
GLAZING SEALANTS
GLAZING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
088000 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
A.
General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with
other materials they will contact, under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at
time of installation.
Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full
range.
Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for
each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing
ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint
substrates.
1.
Single-Component Silicone Glazing Sealants:
a.
Products:
1)
2)
3)
4)
2.7
Dow Corning Corporation; 790.
GE Silicones; SilPruf SCS2000.
Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.; Omniseal.
Tremco; Spectrem 3.
GLAZING TAPES
A.
Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric
tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer
rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and
complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive
on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:
1.
2.
2.8
AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.
AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous
pressure.
AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous
pressure.
AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.
AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a
full bead of liquid sealant.
MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.
B.
Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
GLAZING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
088000 - 5
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
C.
Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or
minus 5.
D.
Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer
hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation
indicated.
E.
Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side
walking).
F.
Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
performance.
2.9
FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS
A.
Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and
face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of
product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance
requirements.
B.
Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces
square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with outdoor and indoor faces.
C.
Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
3.2
Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and
offsets at corners.
Minimum required face or edge clearances.
Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.
B.
Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so
that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave
visible marks in the completed work.
GLAZING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
088000 - 6
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
3.3
GLAZING, GENERAL
A.
Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in
referenced glazing publications.
B.
Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to
provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant
thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.
C.
Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass
from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge
damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair
performance and appearance.
D.
Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
preconstruction testing.
E.
Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
F.
Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.
G.
Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.
1.
2.
Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face
clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.
Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of
tape.
H.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to
requirements in referenced glazing publications.
I.
Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
J.
Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.
K.
Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or
gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when
installation is subjected to movement.
L.
Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
M.
Decorative Film: Apply film in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.
GLAZING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
088000 - 7
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
3.4
TAPE GLAZING
A.
Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
B.
Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to
make them fit opening.
C.
Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
D.
Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
E.
Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.
F.
Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.
G.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
H.
Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
3.5
GASKET GLAZING (DRY)
A.
Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings
exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.
B.
Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
C.
Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed
and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at
corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight
seal without developing bending stresses in glass.
Seal gasket joints with sealant
recommended by gasket manufacturer.
D.
Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and
press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressureglazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to
produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints
with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.
E.
Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
3.6
SEALANT GLAZING (WET)
A.
Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding
into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers
and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge
clearance for optimum sealant performance.
GLAZING
088000 - 8
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
4/9/14
2001-1112.92
Novus Architects, Inc.
B.
Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.
C.
Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.
3.7
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove
nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.
B.
Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
C.
Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
D.
Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
E.
Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before
date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 088000
GLAZING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
088000 - 9
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 088720 - ARCHITECTURAL WINDOW FILM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1
1.2
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Privacy Window Film.
B.
Safety and Security Film.
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
1.3
1.4
REFERENCES
A.
ASTM E 84 - Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of
Building Materials.
B.
ASTM E 308 - Standard Recommended Practice for Spectophotometry and
Description of Color in CIE 1931 System.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.5
1.6
1.7
Section 088000 - Glazing: General Glazing applications to receive architectural
window film.
Fire Performance: Surface burning characteristics when tested in accordance ASTM
E 84:
1.
Flame Spread: 25, maximum.
2.
Smoke Developed: 450, maximum.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit under provisions of Section 013300.
B.
Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1.
Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3.
Installation methods.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be
supplied by a single manufacturer with a minimum of ten (10) years experience.
B.
Installer Qualifications: All products listed in this section are to be installed by a
single installer with a minimum of five (5) years demonstrated experience in
installing products of the same type and scope as specified.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
B.
Store and dispose of hazardous materials, and materials contaminated by
hazardous materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.8
PROJECT CONDITIONS
ARCHITECTURAL WINDOW FILM
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
088720 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
A.
1.9
Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within
limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products
under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
WARRANTY
A.
At project closeout, provide to Owner or Owners Representative an executed current
copy of the manufacturer's standard limited warranty against manufacturing defect,
outlining its terms, conditions, and exclusions from coverage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
PRIVACY WINDOW FILMS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturer: 3M Window Film , which is located at: 3M Center Bldg.
0223-02-S-24 ; St. Paul, MN 55144-1000; Toll Free Tel: 888-364-3577; Tel: 651737-1053 ; Fax: 651-736-0611; Email: [email protected]; Web:
www.3m.com/windowfilm
B.
Substitutions:
C.
Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of
Section 016000.
D.
Fasara – Milano, Frosted Decorative / Privacy Glazing Film:
1.
Ultraviolet Rejected (ASTM E 903): Not less than 99 percent.
2.
Visible Light Transmission (ASTM E 903, ASTM E308): Not more than 59
percent.
3.
Visible Light Rejected (ASTM E 903): Not less than 17 percent.
4.
Solar Heat Reduction: Not less than 21 percent.
5.
Shading Coefficient at 90 Degrees (Normal Incidence) (ASTM E 903): Not
less than 0.75.
E.
Fasara - Opaque Black Decorative / Privacy Glazing Film:
1.
Ultraviolet Rejected (ASTM E 903): Not less than 99 percent.
2.
Visible Light Transmission (ASTM E 903, ASTM E308): Not more than 6
percent.
3.
Visible Light Rejected (ASTM E 903): Not less than 52 percent.
4.
Solar Heat Reduction: Not less than 41 percent.
5.
Shading Coefficient at 90 Degrees (Normal Incidence) (ASTM E 903): Not
less than 0.29.
F.
Fasara – San Marino, Opaque White Decorative / Privacy Glazing Film:
1.
Ultraviolet Rejected (ASTM E 903): Not less than 99 percent.
2.
Visible Light Transmission (ASTM E 903, ASTM E308): Not more than 6
percent.
3.
Visible Light Rejected (ASTM E 903): Not less than 52 percent.
4.
Solar Heat Reduction: Not less than 41 percent.
5.
Shading Coefficient at 90 Degrees (Normal Incidence) (ASTM E 903): Not
less than 0.29.
2.3
Not permitted.
SAFETY AND SECURITY GLAZING FILMS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturer: ShatterGARD, Inc., 8351 Roswell Road Suite 391,
Atlanta, GA 30350; Voice: (888) 306-7998; Fax: (888) 646-8913; Email:
ARCHITECTURAL WINDOW FILM
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
088720 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
[email protected]; Website: http://www.shattergard.com
A.
Substitutions:
Not permitted.
B.
Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of
Section 016000.
C.
BlastGARD 9: .009 inch (1.19 mm) film: GSA approved fragment retention window
protection. Concerns: Minor ballistic, industrial explosion, bomb blasts. Protect
occupants from flying glass.
1.
Security and Safety Glazing Film: Optically clear, tear-resistant, penetrationresistant, and abrasion-resistant polyester film with pressure-sensitive adhesive.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
3.2
3.3
EXAMINATION
A.
Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B.
If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
PREPARATION
A.
Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B.
Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for
achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
INSTALLATION
A.
3.4
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Remove left over material and debris from Work area. Use necessary means to
protect film before, during, and after installation.
B.
Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
C.
After application of film, wash film using common window cleaning solutions,
including ammonia solutions, 30 days after application. Do not use abrasive type
cleaning agents and bristle brushes to avoid scratching film. Use synthetic sponges
or soft cloths.
END OF SECTION
ARCHITECTURAL WINDOW FILM
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
088720 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:
1.
1.3
Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, furring, etc.).
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate nonload-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in
assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
Steel Framing and Furring:
a.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
Steel Stud Manufacturers’ Association members.
NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL
A.
Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.
1.
2.
Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless
otherwise indicated.
Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise
indicated.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
092216 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.3
STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A.
Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.
1.
2.
B.
Flat Strap and Backing Plate:
indicated.
1.
C.
Minimum Gauge Metal Thickness: 20 gauge, or greater as required to comply with
manufacturer’s requirements for limiting heights and applied loads.
Depth: As indicated
Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width
Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch.
Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide
flanges.
1.
2.
Depth: 1-1/2 inches, unless indicated otherwise.
Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.
D.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where studs extend from floor to deck above, provide the following in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs:
1.
Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes due
to deflection of structure above.
E.
Firestop Tracks: Manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement
of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in
thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.
2.4
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.
1.
B.
Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding
power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.
Isolation Strip for Tracks on Slab-on-Grade: Provide the following:
1.
2.
Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt:
ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),
nonperforated.
Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal
frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other
conditions affecting performance.
1.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
092216 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
3.2
PREPARATION
3.3
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.
1.
Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to
framing installation.
B.
Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim,
grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.
C.
Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.
D.
Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing
members. Frame both sides of joints independently.
3.4
INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES
A.
Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior
walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.
B.
Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.
1.
C.
Space studs as follows: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.
Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural
supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to
terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above
ceiling.
1.
2.
Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to
produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished
assemblies.
Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames;
install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.
a.
b.
3.
4.
Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.
Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch
clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished
assembly.
Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as
required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of
openings to match framing required above door heads.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to
underside of solid structure.
a.
5.
Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistancerated assembly indicated.
Curved Partitions:
a.
Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
092216 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
b.
D.
Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along
arcs. On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6
inches o.c.
Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than
1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.
END OF SECTION 092216
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
092216 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 092400 - CEMENT PLASTERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.2
Exterior vertical plasterwork (stucco).
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
2.2
Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide cement plaster assemblies identical to those
of assemblies tested for fire resistance according to ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency.
METAL LATH
A.
Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847, cold-rolled carbon-steel sheet with ASTM A 653/A 653M,
G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized-zinc coating.
1.
2.
B.
a.
Alabama Metal Industries Company; a Gibraltar Industries company.
b.
CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
c.
ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
d.
Marino\WARE.
e.
Phillips Manufacturing Co.
Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring, 3.4 lb/sq. yd. (1.8 kg/sq. m).
Paper Backing: FS UU-B-790a, Type I, Grade D, Style 2 vapor-permeable paper.
1.
2.3
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to
the following:
Provide paper-backed lath at exterior locations over framed construction only.
ACCESSORIES
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 1063, and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with
thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.
B.
Metal Accessories:
CEMENT PLASTERING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
092400 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet,
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) zinc coating.
Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip
galvanized-zinc coating.
External- (Outside-) Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized-zinc coating.
Cornerbeads: Fabricated from [zinc] [or] [zinc-coated (galvanized) steel].
a.
6.
7.
8.
C.
Alabama Metal Industries Company; a Gibraltar Industries company.
CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.
ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
Marino\WARE.
Phillips Manufacturing Co.
Smallnose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated.
Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged
style; with expanded flanges.
Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece-type,
folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges
and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint.
Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; folded pair of
unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with expanded flanges.
Plastic Accessories: Manufactured from high-impact PVC.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Cornerbeads: With perforated flanges.
a.
3.
Smallnose cornerbead; use unless otherwise indicated.
Casing Beads: With perforated flanges in depth required to suit plaster bases indicated
and flange length required to suit applications indicated.
a.
4.
Alabama Metal Industries Company; a Gibraltar Industries company.
Phillips Manufacturing Co.
Plastic Components, Inc.
Vinyl Corp; a division of ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
Square-edge style; use unless otherwise indicated.
Control Joints: One-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped
configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of
control joint.
CEMENT PLASTERING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
092400 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.4
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Water for Mixing and Finishing Plaster: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting
plaster set or of damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.
B.
Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch (13 mm) long, free
of contaminants, manufactured for use in cement plaster.
C.
Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932.
D.
Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: ASTM C 1063.
E.
Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch (1.21mm) diameter unless otherwise indicated.
2.5
PLASTER MATERIALS
A.
Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I.
1.
B.
Color for Finish Coats: Gray.
Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type N.
1.
Color for Finish Coats: Gray.
C.
Plastic Cement: ASTM C 1328.
D.
Lime: ASTM C 206, Type S; or ASTM C 207, Type S.
E.
Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.
1.
F.
Color for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: White.
Ready-Mixed Finish-Coat Plaster: Mill-mixed portland cement, aggregates, coloring agents, and
proprietary ingredients.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
G.
California Stucco Products Corp.
El Rey Stucco Solutions; a Parex USA, Inc. brand.
Florida Stucco.
LaHabra Stucco Solutions; Parex USA.
Omega Products International, Inc.
QUIKRETE.
Shamrock Stucco LLC.
SonoWall, BASF Wall Systems, Inc.
Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Factory-mixed acrylic-emulsion coating systems formulated with
colorfast mineral pigments and fine aggregates; for use over cement plaster base coats. Include
manufacturer's recommended primers and sealing topcoats for acrylic-based finishes.
CEMENT PLASTERING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
092400 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
2.6
California Stucco Products Corp.
Dryvit Systems, Inc.
El Rey Stucco Solutions; a Parex USA, Inc. brand.
Finestone, BASF Wall Systems, Inc.
Master Wall Inc.
Omega Products International, Inc.
Senergy, BASF Wall Systems, Inc.
Shamrock Stucco LLC.
SonoWall, BASF Wall Systems, Inc.
Sto Corp.
Stuc-O-Flex International, Inc.
PLASTER MIXES
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.
1.
B.
Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two
minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes,
but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. (0.6 kg of fiber/cu. m) of cementitious materials.
Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork
as follows:
1.
Portland Cement Mixes:
a.
b.
2.
Masonry Cement Mixes:
a.
b.
3.
Scratch Coat: Mix 1 part masonry cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.
Brown Coat: Mix 1 part masonry cement and 3 to 5 parts aggregate, but not less
than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat.
Portland and Masonry Cement Mixes:
a.
b.
4.
Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4
parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4
parts lime. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not
less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat.
Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part
masonry cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part
masonry cement. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but
not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat.
Plastic Cement Mixes:
a.
b.
Scratch Coat: Mix 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.
Brown Coat: Mix 1 part plastic cement and 3 to 5 parts aggregate, but not less
than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat.
CEMENT PLASTERING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
092400 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
5.
Portland and Plastic Cement Mixes:
a.
b.
C.
Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Unit Masonry: Single base (scratch) coat for two-coat
plasterwork on low-absorption plaster bases as follows:
1.
2.
3.
D.
2.
3.
4.
Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to 11/2 parts lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
Masonry Cement Mix: Use 1 part masonry cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.
Portland and Masonry Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement
and 1 part masonry cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious
material.
Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.
Job-Mixed Finish-Coat Mixes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 0 to 3/4
part lime. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
Portland and Masonry Cement Mix: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement
and 1 part masonry cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious
material.
Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate.
Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Unit Masonry and Concrete: Single base (scratch) coat for twocoat plasterwork on high-absorption plaster bases as follows:
1.
E.
Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part plastic cement and 1 part
portland cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part plastic cement and 1 part
portland cement. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but
not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat.
Portland Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland cement and 3/4 to
1-1/2 parts lime. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.
Masonry Cement Mix: Use 1 part masonry cement and 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate.
Portland and Masonry Cement Mix: For cementitious materials, mix 1 part portland
cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate per part of
cementitious material.
Plastic Cement Mix: Use 1 part plastic cement and 1-1/2 to 3 parts aggregate.
Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For ready-mixed finish-coat plasters, comply with
manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
Prepare smooth, solid substrates for plaster according to ASTM C 926.
B.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design
designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings.
C.
Sound-Attenuation Blankets: Where required, install blankets before installing lath unless
blankets are readily installed after lath has been installed on one side.
CEMENT PLASTERING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
092400 - 5
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
3.2
INSTALLING METAL LATH
A.
3.3
Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
A.
Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.
B.
Reinforcement for External (Outside) Corners:
1.
2.
C.
3.4
Install cornerbead at exterior locations.
Install cornerbead at interior locations.
Control Joints: Locate as indicated on Drawings.
PLASTER APPLICATION
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 926.
B.
Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry and concrete substrates for direct application of
plaster.
C.
Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: For scratch and brown coats, for three-coat
plasterwork with 3/4-inch (19-mm) total thickness, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
D.
Portland cement mixes.
Masonry cement mixes.
Portland and masonry cement mixes.
Plastic cement mixes.
Portland and plastic cement mixes.
Walls; Base-Coat Mix: For base (scratch) coat, for two-coat plasterwork and having 3/8-inch
(10-mm) thickness on masonry 1/4-inch (6-mm) thickness on concrete, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Portland cement mix.
Masonry cement mix.
Portland and masonry cement mix.
Plastic cement mix.
Portland and plastic cement mix.
E.
Plaster Finish Coats: Apply to provide finish to match existing adjacent
F.
Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, finish coats, and
sealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instructions.
G.
Concealed Exterior Plasterwork: Where plaster application is used as a base for adhered
finishes, omit finish coat.
H.
Concealed Interior Plasterwork:
1.
Where plaster application is concealed behind built-in cabinets, similar furnishings, and
equipment, apply finish coat.
CEMENT PLASTERING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
092400 - 6
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.
3.
3.5
Where plaster application is concealed above suspended ceilings and in similar locations,
omit finish coat.
Where plaster application is used as a base for adhesive application of tile and similar
finishes, omit finish coat.
PLASTER REPAIRS
A.
Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking,
dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed.
END OF SECTION 092400
CEMENT PLASTERING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
092400 - 7
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Interior gypsum board.
Sound attenuation blankets.
Texture finishes.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.3
Product Data: For each type of product.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an
independent testing agency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
C.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (12.7 mm).
Long Edges: Tapered.
Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
D.
American Gypsum.
CertainTeed Corp.
Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.
Lafarge North America Inc.
National Gypsum Company.
USG Corporation.
Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm).
Long Edges: Tapered.
Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be
more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.
GYPSUM BOARD
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
092900 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.
2.
E.
Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.
1.
2.
F.
Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm).
Long Edges: Tapered.
Paperless, Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: ASTM C1177/C 1177M. Non-combustible,
moisture- and mold-resistant gypsum core with coated glass mat facings.
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm).
Long Edges: Tapered.
Thickness: 5/8-inch thick (15.9 mm).
Long Edges: Tapered.
Basis-of-Design Product: G-P-Gypsum Corporation; “DensArmor Plus” Paperless Interior
Drywall.
TRIM ACCESSORIES
A.
Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.
1.
B.
2.3
Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced
galvanized steel sheet.
Aluminum Trim: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS
A.
General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.
B.
Joint Tape:
Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.
C.
2.4
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible
with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.
TEXTURE FINISHES
A.
Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.
B.
Non-Aggregate Finish: Pre-mixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Easi-Tex Spray Texture.
National Gypsum Company; Perfect Spray EM Texture.
USG Corporation; BEADEX FasTex Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture.
Texture: Spatter knock-down.
GYPSUM BOARD
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
092900 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.5
AUXILIARY MATERIALS
A.
Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum
panels to continuous substrate.
B.
Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS
A.
Comply with ASTM C 840.
B.
Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold
damaged.
C.
Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these
locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints
between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.
D.
Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used
for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.
Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations
approved by Architect for visual effect.
E.
Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.
F.
Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not
intended to receive tape.
G.
Gypsum Board Finish Levels:
ASTM C 840:
1.
2.
3.
Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to
Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.
Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile or where indicated on Drawings.
Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.
a.
Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior
Painting."
H.
Texture Finish Application: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces
receiving texture finishes. Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a
uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin
application or of application patterns.
I.
Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove
from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise
damaged during drywall application.
GYPSUM BOARD
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
092900 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
J.
Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.
END OF SECTION 092900
GYPSUM BOARD
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
092900 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes:
1.
Acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
2.
Sound attenuation blankets.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
B.
Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.
1.3
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
A.
Storage and installation of acoustical panels shall not begin until building is enclosed,
permanent heating and cooling equipment is in operation, and residual moisture from
construction activities has dissipated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions, refer
to drawings for seismic design requirements.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency.
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
2.2
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS, GENERAL
A.
Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.
B.
Acoustical Panel Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.
C.
Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.
D.
Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1,
"Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.
E.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
095113 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.3
ACOUSTICAL PANELS
A.
ACT-1
1.
Water Felted, Mineral-Base with painted finish Acoustical Panels for Acoustical Panel
Ceiling.
a.
USG Corporation: "Radar ClimaPlus Panels" (no substitutes).
b.
Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and
pattern as follows:
1)
Type and Form: Type III, Form 2.
2)
Pattern: Pattern C,D,E.
3)
Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A.
c.
Color: White.
d.
Recycled Content: Not less than 36.5.
e.
LR: Not less than 0.84.
f.
NRC: Not less than 0.55 in accordance with ASTM C423. Product to have UL
acoustical compliance.
g.
CAC: Not less than 35 in accordance with ASTM E1414. Product to have UL
acoustical compliance.
h.
Edge Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension system
members. Square Edge.
i.
Thickness: 5/8"
j.
Size: 2' x 4'
k.
Formaldehyde and VOC Classification: "Low-Emitting" as defined by CHPS,
COEHHA, & LEED for Schools referenced in Section 09 51 13 1.05.E.
l.
Panel Warranty: When used with a USG Donn Brand suspension system, this
panel has a 30 year warranty that it shall be free from manufacturing defects.
When used without a USG Donn Brand suspension system, the period of warranty
is 10 years.
B.
ACT-2
1.
Water Felted, Mineral-Base with painted finish Acoustical Panels for Acoustical Panel
Ceiling.
a.
USG Corporation: "Olympia Micro ClimaPlus .50 NRC Panels" (no substitutes)
b.
Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and
pattern as follows:
1)
Type and Form: Type III, Form 2.
2)
Pattern: Pattern C,E.
3)
Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A.
c.
Color: White.
d.
Recycled Content: Not less than 52.
e.
LR: Not less than 0.87.
f.
NRC: Not less than 0.5 in accordance with ASTM C423. Product to have UL
acoustical compliance.
g.
CAC: Not less than 35 in accordance with ASTM E1414. Product to have UL
acoustical compliance.
h.
Edge Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension system
members. Shadowline Tapered.
i.
Thickness: 5/8"
j.
Size: 2' x 2'
k.
Formaldehyde and VOC Classification: "Low-Emitting" as defined by CHPS,
COEHHA, & LEED for Schools referenced in Section 09 51 13 1.05.E.
l.
Panel Warranty: When used with a USG Donn Brand suspension system, this
panel has a 30 year warranty that it shall be free from manufacturing defects.
When used without a USG Donn Brand suspension system, the period of warranty
is 10 years.
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
095113 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.4
METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
General: ASTM C635, commercial quality pretreated and painted hot-dipped
galvanized cold-rolled steel, exposed surfaces prefinished in manufacturer's
standard corrosion resistant enamel paint finish; color: Flat White #050 or as
selected from manufacturer's standard colors.
USG Corporation: " Donn DX/DXL" (no substitutes).
Suspension System Components:
1)
Fire Rated Main Tees: UL Classified Intermediate Duty Classification;
double-web design; 1-1/2" high; rectangular top bulb; 15/16" exposed flange
with roll-formed steel cap; cross tee holes and hanger wire holes at 6" o.c.;
convenience holes at approximately 2" o.c.; integral reversible splices.
2)
Cross Tees :
a)
1-1/2" high; roll-formed into double-web design with rectangular bulb;
15/16" exposed flange with prepainted steel cap; high tensile steel
end clips clenched to web.
b)
1" high; roll-formed into double-web design with rectangular bulb;
15/16" exposed flange with prepainted steel cap; high tensile steel
end clips clenched to web.
c)
Main tees and cross tees shall be positively locked, yet shall be
removable without the use of tools.
Accessories:
1)
Wall Molding: Angle shape; 7/8" mounting flange by 7/8" face flange;
hemmed edges; exposed surface pre-finished to match suspension system
components.
a)
Inside Corner: Field-mitered joints at wall molding.
b)
Inside Corner: Prefabricated corner cap; formed to 90° angle;
hemmed edge; size and finish to match wall molding.
c)
Outside Corner: Prefabricated corner cap; formed to 90° angle;
hemmed edge; size and finish to match wall molding.
2)
Shadow Molding: Formed steel section; exposed surfaces to match
suspension system components.
a)
7/8" exposed flange; 3/4" x 3/4" reveal; 7/8" mounting flange.
3)
Channel Molding: U-shape; hemmed edges; exposed surfaces pre-finished
to match suspension system components; 1" or 1/2" exposed flange by
depth as required for ceiling material.
Suspension System Attachment devices:
1)
Hanger Wire: Galvanized carbon steel; soft temper; pre-stretched; yield
stress load at least three times the design load but not less than 12-gauge.
Suspension System Warranty: When used with a USG acoustical ceiling panel,
this suspension system has a Lifetime 30 year warranty that it shall be free from
the occurrence of 50% red rust. When used without a USG acoustical ceiling
panel, the period of warranty is 10 years.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic design
requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling
Systems Handbook."
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
095113 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
B.
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
1.
Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as indicated on reflected ceiling plans.
C.
Lighting Fixtures:
1.
All light fixtures shall be mechanically attached to the suspension system per NEC 41016 (two per fixture unless the fixture is independently supported).
2.
Support of rigid lay-in (Type G) or can light fixtures:
1)
Each fixture less than 10 lbs. shall have a single wire (wire may be slack)
attached from the fixture to structure.
2)
Each fixture that weighs between 10 and 56 lbs. shall have two wires (wires
may be slack) attached at diagonal corners of the fixture to structure.
3)
Each fixture greater than 56 lbs. shall be directly supported to structure by
approved hangers.
4)
Pendant light fixtures shall be directly supported from structure with 9-gauge
wire (or approved alternative).
D.
Air Terminals:
a.
Air terminals less than 20 lbs. shall be positively attached to the suspension
system
b.
Air terminals that weigh between 20 and 56 lbs. shall be mechanically attached to
the suspension system. Two slack wires shall be attached from the housing to
structure.
c.
Air terminals in excess of 56 lbs. shall be directly supported to structure by
approved hangers.
E.
END OF SECTION 095113
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
095113 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 095800 – DECORATIVE GRID AND LUMINOUS INFILL PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
A.
1.02
SUMMARY
This Section includes, but is not limited to, the following:
1.
Metal suspension systems
2.
Trim and accessories
SUBMITTALS
A.
Technical Data: Submit manufacturer’s catalog cuts or standard drawing showing details of system
with project conditions clearly identified and manufacturer’s recommended installation instructions.
B.
Samples: Submit color samples.
1.03
A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Environmental Limitations: Do not install decorative grid and wire-grate panels until spaces are
enclosed and weather-proof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is
complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated
for Project when occupied for its intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
2.02
A.
MANUFACTURER
All manufactured by USG (United States Gypsum Company, USG Interiors), Chicago, IL, USA, in
compliance with applicable ASTM Standards.
1.
DONN® Brand GridWare™ Suspension System
2.
USG Translucents™ Luminous Infill Panels
3.
No substitutes.
MATERIALS
DONN® Brand GridWare™ Suspension System – Commercial quality, cold-rolled steel, hot dipped
galvanized coated; finish paint color (Silver Satin); punched only every 24”.
1.
Main Tees: 1-1/2” High x 144” Long
a. GWDX 15/16” Face
b. Painted 360 degrees.
2.
Cross Members: 1-1/2” High
c. GWDX-224 15/16” Face x 24” Long)
d. Painted 360 degrees; quick release cross tee ends for positive locking and removability without tools; with exposed chromate clips, field painted to match
grid color finish (left unpainted).
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
95800 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Wall Moldings: Paintable flex mold for curved applications, 9/16” Face x 1-1/2” High x
144” (GWM-9)
a.
Finish paint color: (Silver Satin).
Field Touch-up Paint Kit: color to match finish selected on Grid from USG Interiors
(USG), Chicago, IL.
Wire: Hanger Wire, 1/32” black coated Stainless Steel rope wire with Loop and CrimpEnd Connection
a.
ASTM Designation A492: Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Rope Wire.
USG Translucents Luminous Infill Panels
1.
2’ x 2’ panels (23-3/4” x 23-3/4”)
2.
0.374 lbs/sf
®
3.
Lexan
a.
Class A rating
4.
Color: Clear Matte
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which grid or panels
attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other
Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
A.
3.03
PREPARATION
Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with
layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install grid members to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic requirements indicated, per
manufacturer’s written instructions and CISCA’s “Ceiling Systems Handbook.”
B.
Manufacturer’s reference: install in accordance with manufacturer’s current printed
recommendations.
C.
Drawing reference: Install in accordance with approved shop drawings and locate ceiling in
accordance with main tee dimensions relative to elevations.
D.
Drop ceiling applications:
1.
Lay out ceiling area as indicated on reflected ceiling plan before any installation.
2.
Hanger wire installation: Secure hanger wires to upper structural elements and space
hangers so that each hanger wire supports a maximum of 16 sq. ft. Lay-out as reflected
and dimensioned in reflected ceiling plan.
3.
Space main tee members a maximum span of 48” on center.
4.
Space cross tees as indicated on reflected ceiling plan, usually 24” and/or 48”.
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
95800 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
3.04
A.
Install bracing wires to suspension members and to supports without attachment to metal
formwork, steel decks or steel deck tabs.
Install trim, and similar accessories as necessary and as applicable to meet project
requirements where indicated on drawings.
Install wearing soft gloves to reduce transfer of oil to finished framing members.
Install mains and tees as to align joints in a straight parallel/perpendicular fashion as
indicated on reflected ceiling plan. Fit all joints tight and flush.
If cross tee’s chromate clips are to be field painted, paint after installed but before panel
installation.
Flexible wall molding shall be field painted to match grid system.
If installation of grid is not wall to wall, but free style, install trim before panels.
If grid is terminated at walls or not complete 24” modules, care should be taken as panels
have cutting limitations.
Install panels by dropping down into grid frame from above.
Remove all manufacturer-applied temporary protective coverings, clean and touchup
minor finish damage. If parts were damaged, remove and replace as needed.
Upon completion, clean all exposed surfaces of decorative suspension grid including
trims and edge molding.
CLEANING
Clean exposed surfaces of grid members and panels, including trim and edge moldings after
removing strippable, temporary protective covering, if any. Comply with manufacturer’s written
instructions for stripping of temporary protective covering, cleaning, and touchup of minor finish
damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and
repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage, including dented and bent units.
END OF SECTION 095800
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
95800 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Resilient base.
Resilient molding accessories.
Resilient stair accessories
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size of each resilient
product color, texture, and pattern required.
1.3
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to
receive resilient products.
B.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer.
C.
Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been
completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RESILIENT BASE (VB-1)
A.
Resilient Base:
1.
B.
Manufacturers: Johnsonite
Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.
1.
2.
3.
Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset).
Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous).
Style: Cove (base with toe).
C.
Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
D.
Height: 4 inches (102 mm).
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
096513 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
E.
Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F.
Outside Corners: Preformed.
G.
Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
H.
Finish: As indicated on drawings.
I.
Colors and Patterns: As indicated on drawings.
2.2
RESILIENT BASE (VB-2)
A.
Resilient Base:
1.
B.
Manufacturers: Johnsonite
Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.
1.
2.
3.
Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset).
Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous).
Style: Cove (base with toe).
C.
Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
D.
Height: 6 inches (102 mm).
E.
Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.
F.
Outside Corners: Preformed.
G.
Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.
H.
Finish: As indicated on drawings.
I.
Colors and Patterns: As indicated on drawings.
2.3
RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY
A.
Resilient Molding Accessory:
1.
Manufacturers: Johnsonite.
.
B.
Description: Reducer strip for resilient floor covering.
C.
Material: Rubber.
D.
Profile and Dimensions: As indicated on drawings.
E.
Colors and Patterns: As indicated on drawings.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
096513 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.4
RUBBER STAIR ACCESSORIES (RST-1)
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
B.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
C.
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company.
Stair Treads: ASTM F 2169.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Type: TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset).
Class: 2 (pattern; embossed, grooved, or ribbed).
Nosing Style: Square, adjustable to cover angles between 60 and 90 degrees.
Thickness: 1/4 inch (6 mm) and tapered to back edge.
Size: Lengths and depths to fit each stair tread in one piece.
Integral Risers: Smooth, flat; in height that fully covers substrate.
D.
Landing Tile: Matching treads; produced by same manufacturer as treads and recommended
by manufacturer for installation with treads.
E.
Locations: Provide rubber stair accessories in areas indicated.
F.
Colors and Patterns: Refer to finish schedule on drawings.
2.5
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for
applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and
substrate conditions indicated.
1.
2.
Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B.
Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories:
ASTM F 710.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
Prepare according to
096513 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives
and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.
Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed
with installation only after substrates pass testing.
a.
b.
Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of
water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.
Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level
measurement.
C.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D.
Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to
be installed.
1.
E.
3.2
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed
at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation.
RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.
B.
Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and
other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.
C.
Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of
adjacent pieces aligned.
D.
Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
E.
Do not stretch resilient base during installation.
3.3
RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.
B.
Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates
throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet resilient floor covering
that would otherwise be exposed.
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
096513 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
3.4
Resilient Stair Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.
Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece.
For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint
between units.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.
B.
Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096513
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
096513 - 5
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.2
Solid vinyl floor tile.
Rubber floor tile.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Samples for verification: Manufacturer’s standard sized sample of each color and pattern of
floor tile required.
1.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Maintenance data.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to
ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.
1.
1.5
Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to
receive floor tile.
B.
Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by
manufacturer.
C.
Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.
D.
Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.
E.
Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
096519 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
FloorScore Compliance: Resilient tile flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore
Standard.
B.
Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product requirements
of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.2
SOLID VINYL FLOOR TILE
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
1.
Altro Group; Dolce, see drawings
B.
Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).
C.
Size: 18 by 18 inches (457 by 457 mm).
D.
Colors and Patterns: As indicated on drawings
2.3
RUBBER FLOOR TILE
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:
Flexco; FlexTuft Non-Vulcanized Recycled Tire Tile - Manufactured with approximately 95%
of the components from recycled truck and bus tires. Strips are adhered to an SpunPolyester backing and buffed to a non-glare tufted surface. Thickness: nominal 3/8” (9.52
mm)
a. Color: As indicated on drawings.
b. Size: 12” x 12” (304.8 mm x 304.8 mm) nominal
c. Gap between tiles on all sides: 1/16” for expansion.
B.
Wearing Surface: Textured.
2.4
RUBBER FLOOR TILE WITH RAISED SQUARE FOR RAMPS
A.
Products: Johnsonite RTSP-Sq raised square tile
B.
Thickness: 0.125" (3.2 mm).
C.
Size: 24" x 24"
D.
Color: As indicated on drawings.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
096519 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.5
INSTALLATION MATERIALS
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for
applications indicated.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate
conditions indicated.
C.
FloorScore Compliance: Resilient tile flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore
Standard.
1.
Adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):
a.
b.
2.
D.
VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.
Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.
Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of
resilient products.
B.
Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives
and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by
manufacturer. Do not use solvents.
Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed
with installation only after substrates pass testing.
Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor covering manufacturer and as
follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.
a.
b.
Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of
water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.
Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with
installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level
measurement.
C.
Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.
D.
Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
096519 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.
E.
3.2
Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed
at least 48 hours in advance of installation.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before
installation.
FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.
B.
Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets,
so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut
widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.
1.
C.
Lay tiles in pattern indicated.
Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed
tiles.
1.
Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.
D.
Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures
including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.
E.
Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles
to center of door openings.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent,
nonstaining marking device.
G.
Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.
3.3
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and provide five (5) applications of
protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer of floor tile.
B.
Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION 096519
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
096519 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 096710 – DECORATIVE RESINOUS FLOORING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Decorative resinous flooring systems, specifically colored vinyl chip as
manufactured by American Industrial.
1.2
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements: Provide resinous flooring that has been manufactured and
installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or
failure.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit product data, including manufacturer’s Technical Data product sheet,
for specified products, and manufacturer’s installation instructions.
B. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finishes, colors, and textures.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who has
specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project.
a. Installer shall be an established company with at least 3 years of experience in
the installation of polymer floors.
b. Contractor shall demonstrate the ability to undertake and complete the
required work and furnish documentation regarding the successful completion of
projects of similar size and complexity.
2. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be capable of providing technical
support, qualified applicators, and approval of application methods.
B. Preinstallation Meetings: Conduct a preinstallation meeting to verify flooring system
specifications (color, texture, etc.), substrate analysis, and manufacturer’s installation
instructions.
C. Preinstallation Testing: Conduct preinstallation testing as follows:
1. Water Vapor Transmission: Calcium Chloride tests should be conducted to determine
the amount of water vapor coming through the slab. The results should be compared to
limitations set forth by the manufacturer.
2. Core Sample Testing: (optional) Core samples should be taken and analyzed if the
installer believes there to be a problem with the integrity of the substrate that may affect
flooring system performance.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING
A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Sections
B. Ordering: Comply with Manufacturer’s ordering procedures and allow for enough lead-time for
custom blends so as not to interfere with construction schedules.
DECORATIVE RESINOUS FLOORING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
096710 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
C. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with
identification labels intact.
D. Storage and Protection: Store materials where they are protected from direct sunlight and
harmful weather conditions. Meet manufacturer’s condition for temperature, humidity, etc.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Requirements/Conditions: Substrate and ambient air temperature shall be in
accordance with manufacturer’s requirements.
B. Temperature Requirements: Maintain air temperature in spaces where products will be
installed for time period before, during and after installation as recommended by manufacturer.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
RESINOUS FLOORING
A. Manufacturer: aiflooring.
1. Contact: 1218 West 41st Street, Suite B, Tulsa Oklahoma 74107. Phone: 918-4450627 Fax: 918-445-0627
2.2
®
TERRACHIP VINYL CHIP FLOORING SYSTEM
A. System Description: TerraChip Micro is a decorative vinyl flake polymer flooring system that is
installed at a thickness of 30-35mils. Colored vinyl paint flakes are broadcast into wet
basecoat to provide the color and pattern. A clear light stabilized epoxy seal coat is applied
over the cured basecoat and chips. A polyurea finish coat is then applied to provide long-term
gloss retention and color stability.
B. TerraChip System Components:
1. TerraChip Base: A 2 component 100% solids, non-blushing polyamide cured epoxy
coating. TC Basecoat color should match vinyl chip pattern as recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Aggregate: Vinyl paint flakes in the color scheme approved by owner.
3. Sealer LS: A 2 component, 100% solids cycloaliphatic cured, clear epoxy coating.
Sealer LS is light stabilized through the use of hydrogenated epoxy and uV inhibitors.
4. TerraThane: A 2 component 100% solids polyurea clear finish. TerraThane exhibits
excellent color and gloss retention.
5. TerraGrip: A graded, plastic aggregate added to finish coat for slip resistance.
2.3
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions: No substitutions permitted.
2.4
SOURCE QUALITY
A. Source Quality: Obtain resinous materials, including patching and leveling materials from a
single manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
DECORATIVE RESINOUS FLOORING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
096710 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
3.1
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer’s product data, including product technical data sheets
and application instructions.
3.2
EXAMINATION
A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify substrate conditions, which have been previously
installed under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
1. Before applying materials, inspect surfaces to receive new materials and report any
unsatisfactory conditions. Absence of any such report shall constitute installer’s
acceptance of surfaces as satisfactory for installing materials.
3.3
PREPARATION
A. Adjacent Surfaces Protection: Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage
during product installation. Areas not accessible shall be mechanically scarified.
B. Surface Preparation:
1. Mechanical Cleaning: Concrete floor surfaces receiving polymer flooring systems shall
be thoroughly cleaned and prepared by shotblasting and/or diamond grinding.
2. Patching Damaged Substrate: Holes, voids, static cracks, and other substrate surface
defects should be patched and repaired according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
3.4
INSTALLATION
A. Resinous Flooring Installation: The following are abbreviated guidelines that provide for basic
application steps for the installation of the systems. Detailed instructions should be obtained
from the manufacturer.
1. TerraChip System:
a.
Priming: Priming the concrete is unnecessary unless substrate is sufficiently rough so
as to require additional film build or installer believes that the substrate may present
bonding problems. Prime according to manufacturer’s recommendation.
b.
Patching: Patch surface defects according to manufacturer’s recommendations.
c.
Basecoat: Apply TerraChip Basecoat at a rate of 150 sq. ft/gallon.
d.
Aggregate: Broadcast TerraChip Micro Chips within 30 minutes of application of the
basecoat. Broadcast chips until basecoat is no longer visible (approximately 18-20
lbs. per 100 sq. ft.)
e.
Scraping: Once basecoat is cured, the coating should be scraped in all four directions
using a flat blade. Excess chips should then be removed by sweeping and/or
vacuuming.
f.
Double Seal Coat: Sealer LS should be applied at an approximate rate of 125 sq. ft.
per gallon. Then, a finish coat of TerraThane should be applied at a rate of 250 sq. ft.
per gallon. Apply Terragrip to finish coat at rate recommended by manufacturer.
DECORATIVE RESINOUS FLOORING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
096710 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
g. Addition Slip resistance: In front of all doors leading into the facility from the outside,
and on all interior ramps, lightly broadcast 36grit aluminum oxide into wet TerraThane
finish coat prior to final roll.
B. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or
replace damaged installed products. Clean installed product in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions prior to Owner’s acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally
dispose of debris.
3.5
PROTECTION
A. Protection: Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction.
END OF SECTION
DECORATIVE RESINOUS FLOORING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
096710 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 096813 – TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
This Section includes modular, carpet tile.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on
physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations
for each type of substrate.
B.
Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label
each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation
indicated on Drawings and in schedules.
1.
2.
Carpet Tile: Manufacturer’s standard sized sample
Exposed Edge, Transition, and other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples.
C.
Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.
D.
Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1.
2.
E.
1.3
Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and
procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.4
Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering
Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program
requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.5
Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and
Section 7.12, "Ventilation."
B.
Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and
dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for
Project when occupied for its intended use.
TILE CARPETING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
096813 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
C.
Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to
bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
D.
Where exhibits or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet
tiles before installing these items.
1.6
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees
to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
2.
3.
1.7
Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic,
failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.
Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge
raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, dimensional stability, and delamination.
Warranty Period: Lifetime.
EXTRA MATERIALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels
describing contents.
1.
Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated,
but not less than 10 sq. yd.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CARPET TILE (CPT-1)
A.
Provide LEE’S MAST MODULAR GT055 (no substitutes).
B.
Fiber Type: Antron Lumena Minimum 10% Recycled Content.
C.
Texture: Patterned loop.
D.
Dye Method: 100% Solution Dyed.
E.
Pile Height: 0.187 inch average.
F.
Machine Gauge: 5/64 inch.
G.
Primary Backing: Non-woven synthetic fiber.
H.
Size: 24 by 24inches, unless otherwise indicated.
I.
Flammability: Class 1.
J.
Applied Soil-Resistance Treatment: Ensure.
TILE CARPETING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
096813 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
K.
Antimicrobial Treatment: Manufacturer's standard material.
L.
Color: As indicated in Finish Material Legend.
M.
Warranty: 10 years.
2.2
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES
A.
Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based
formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
B.
Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit
products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for
installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other
conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and
potential defects.
B.
Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
3.2
Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other
materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness
characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile
manufacturer.
Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-inPlace Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile.
Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with
carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to
receive carpet tile installation.
B.
Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written
instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks,
holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more
stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical
methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
TILE CARPETING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
096813 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
D.
Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive
manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum
surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive.
E.
Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General:
Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile
manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B.
Installation Method: Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure-sensitive
adhesive.
C.
Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.
D.
Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture
including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
E.
Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions,
removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.
F.
Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting
by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking
device.
G.
Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
H.
Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not
fill seams of access flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:
1.
2.
3.
Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner
recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface.
Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
B.
Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor
Installations."
C.
Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment
and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or
recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 096813
TILE CARPETING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
096813 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 097700 – FIBER REINFORCED LAMINATE PANELS (FRL)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to this section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes:
1.
Fiber reinforced laminate wall panels (FRL).
2.
Accessories including adhesives and sealants.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
Section 092500 – Gypsum Board.
2.
Section 096519 – Resilient Floor Tile.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A.
National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association NEMA: NEMA LD3.13 – Wear Resistance.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A.
Product data: Manufacturer’s literature describing product characteristics, accessories and
limitations.
B.
Manufacturer’s Instructions:
Indicate installation requirements, special procedures, and
conditions requiring special attention.
C.
Color Samples: Manufacturer’s sized sample of each color specified.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Allow panels to acclimate for 48 hours in temperature environment reasonably close to
installation space.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A.
Panolam Industries International, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
B.
Tel (877) FRL-WALL (375-9255), Fax (203) 225-0050
Email [email protected]
Web Site http://www.panolam.com
Substitions: No substitutions allowed.
2.2 FRL PANELS
A.
Fiberglass Reinforced Laminate – Propoerties:
1.
Product: Thermofused melamine overlay, decorative paper and Fire Rated phenolic paper
and Fire Rated phenolic paper with fiber reinforcing inner layers.
2.
Nominal Thickness: 0.088 inch.
FIBER REINFORCED LAMINATE PANELS (FRL)
097700 - 1
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
4/9/14
2001-1112.92
Novus Architects, Inc.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Panel net size 36” X, 48” X, and 60” X, 96” and 120”
Surface Burning Characteristics: Rating of 25 or less as tested to ASTM E84.
Smoke Developed: 55, tested to ASTM E84.
Wear Resistance: 3500, tested to NEMA 3.13.
Flexural Strength: 20,148 psi, tested to ASTM D790.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A.
Adhesive: -PL Premium Polyurethane Construction Adhesive by Henkel in 5-gallon pails. Apply
as instructed by manufacturer and conforming to Part 3, section 3.3 Installation.
B.
Molding or Trim: FRL may be used with standard trim available the appropriate size and
configuration:
1.
Division Bars (between panels)
2.
Inside corners
3.
Outside corners
4.
Cap (top molding)
5.
Aluminum moldings as available from:
Nudo Products
1500 Taylor Ave
Springfield, IL
800/826-4132
2.4 FINISHES
A.
Panel Color, Texture and Finish: as specified on Finish Material Legend, based on Pionite or
Nevamar High Pressure Laminate color palette.
B.
Molding or trim: Manufacturer’s standard anodized aluminum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A.
Verify conditions ready to receive work of this Section before beginning.
B.
Verify gypsum board substrate smooth, plumb and true, free of waves, bulges, and within
tolerances specified by Section 092500.
3.2 PREPARATION
A.
Clean substrate of dirt, dust, waxes and other bond breaking substances prior to beginning
installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A.
Install panels with bottom edge located to clear top of resilient base specified by Section 096519.
B.
Apply adhesive uniformly using adhesive manufacturer’s recommendaed notched trowel to the
entire back of panels completely to the edge.
C.
Lay FRL panels in place leaving approximately 1/8 inch between panel joints.
FIBER REINFORCED LAMINATE PANELS (FRL)
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
097700 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
D.
Follow adhesive manufacturer’s recommendations for set and application times.
E.
Apply pressure to entire panel face with laminate type “J” roller, removing trapped air and ensure
proper adhesion between interior surfaces.
3.4 ADJUSTING
A.
Replace installations out of plumb and not aligned with adjacent panels and construction.
3.5 CLEANING
A.
Clean panel face to remove soiling, stains, dust and dirt using clean rags, and cleaning agents as
instructed by manufacturer.
B.
Leave installation clean, free of residue and debris resulting from work of this Section
END OF SECTION 097700
FIBER REINFORCED LAMINATE PANELS (FRL)
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
097700 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
exterior substrates:
1.
Concrete masonry units (CMU) or stucco.
2.
Steel.
3.
EIFS
4.
Existing aluminum storefront frame.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Gloss Level 1: FLAT, Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
B.
Gloss Level 5: SEMI-GLOSS, 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other
Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated.
1.
Sherwin Williams (BASIS OF DESIGN)
2.
PPG Pittsburgh Paints
3.
Benjamin Moore
PAINT, GENERAL
A.
MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed
in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B.
Material Compatibility:
1.
2.
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
099113 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.3
BLOCK FILLER
A.
2.4
Block filler, Latex, interior/exterior, MPI 4.
1.
Sherwin Williams PrepRite, Int./Ext. Block Filler.
CONCRETE PRIMERS
A.
2.5
Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: MPI #3.
1.
Sherwin-Williams Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer.
METAL PRIMERS
A.
Primer, Alkyd, Anti-Corrosive for Metal: MPI #79.
1.
Sherwin Williams Protective & Marine, Kem Kromik Universal Primer.
B.
Primer, Epoxy Primer, for aluminum storefront.
1.
PPG Coraflon ADS, epoxy primer.
2.6
WATER-BASED PAINTS
A.
2.7
Latex, Exterior Flat (Gloss Level 1): MPI #10.
1.
Sherwin Williams A-100, Exterior Latex Flat.
SOLVENT-BASED PAINTS
A.
Alkyd, Exterior, Semi-Gloss (Gloss Level 5): MPI #94.
1.
Sherwin Williams, Protective & Marine, DTM Alkyd Semi-Gloss.
B.
Flouropolymer, for aluminum storefront.
1.
PPG Coraflon ADS Flouropolymer, match existing gloss level
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Concrete: 12 percent.
Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
Wood: 15 percent.
Portland Cement Plaster: 12 percent.
Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
099113 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
C.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
3.2
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.
B.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
3.3
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
APPLICATION
A.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI
Manual."
B.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
3.4
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
B.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
3.5
EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
A.
CMU Substrates:
1.
B.
Latex System:
a.
Block Filler: Block filler, Latex, interior/exterior, MPI 4.
b.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
a.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #10.
Stucco Substrates:
1.
Latex System:
a.
Primer, Alkali Resistant, Water Based: MPI #3.
b.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Latex, exterior flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #10.
EXTERIOR PAINTING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
099113 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
C.
Steel Substrates:
1.
D.
Existing Exterior Insulation and Finish System:
1.
E.
Alkyd System:
a.
Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anticorrosive for metal, MPI #79.
b.
Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.
c.
Topcoat: Alkyd, exterior, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #94.
Latex System:
a.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, exterior, matching topcoat.
b.
Topcoat: S-W A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6 Series.
Existing aluminum storefront:
1.
Fluoropolymer System: One finish coat applied over an epoxy primer.
a.
Primer: PPG Coraflon ADS Epoxy Primer ADS 573/ADS574. Applied at a
dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm).
b.
Finish: PPG Coraflon ADS Fluoropolymer. Apply per instructions on the technical
data bulletin. Metallic finishes may require an additional clear coat of Coraflon
ADS.
END OF SECTION 099113
EXTERIOR PAINTING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
099113 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
1.2
Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following
interior substrates:
1.
Steel.
2.
Wood.
3.
Gypsum board.
4.
Concrete masonry unit (CMU)
DEFINITIONS
A.
Gloss Level 1: FLAT, Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
B.
Gloss Level 3: EGGSHELL, 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees,
according to ASTM D 523.
C.
Gloss Level 5: SEMI-GLOSS, 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.
1.3
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application
instructions.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same
manufacturer as the finish coats.
B.
Coordination of Work: Review other sections in which primers are provided to ensure
compatibility of the total systems for various substrates. On request, furnish information on
characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other
Part 2 articles for the paint category indicated.
1.
Sherwin Williams (BASIS-OF DESIGN)
2.
PPG Pittsburgh Paints
3.
Benjamin Moore
INTERIOR PAINTING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
099123 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.2
PAINT, GENERAL
A.
MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed
in its "MPI Approved Products List."
B.
Material Compatibility:
1.
2.
C.
2.3
Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.
VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and, for
interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, provide within limits for products specified.
exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D
(EPA Method 24).
BLOCK FILLERS
A.
2.4
Block Filler, Latex, Interior/Exterior, <51g/l VOC, MPI #4.
1.
Sherwin-Williams PrepRite, Int./Ext. Block Filler
PRIMERS/SEALERS
A.
Primer, latex, for interior wood,51-100g/l VOC, MPI #39.
1.
Sherwin Williams PrepRite, Multi-Purpose Latex Primer
B.
Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor, <11g/l VOC, MPI #149.
1.
Sherwin Williams Harmony, Interior Latex Primer
C.
Primer sealer, latex, interior, <51g/l VOC, MPI #50.
1.
Sherwin Williams ProGreen 200, ProGreen 200 Latex Primer
2.5
METAL PRIMERS
A.
2.6
Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based, <101g/l VOC, MPI #107.
1.
Sherwin Williams Pro Industrial, Pro-Cryl Universal Primer
WATER-BASED PAINTS
A.
Latex, interior, institutional low odor, <11g/l VOC, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143.
1.
Sherwin Williams Harmony, Interior Latex Flat
B.
Latex, interior, institutional low odor, <11g/ VOC, eggshell (Gloss Level 3), MPI #145.
1.
Sherwin Williams Promar 200 Zero VOC, Interior Latex Eg-shel
C.
Latex, interior, institutional low odor, <11g/l VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #147.
1.
Sherwin Williams Harmony, Interior Latex semi-Gloss
INTERIOR PAINTING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
099123 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
D.
2.7
Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss, <51g/l, semi-gloss (Gloss Level 5),
MPI #141.
1.
Sherwin Williams All surface Enamel, Zero VOC Acrylic Semi-Gloss.
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B.
Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter
as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Concrete: 12 percent.
Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.
Wood: 15 percent.
Gypsum Board: 12 percent.
Plaster: 12 percent.
C.
Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing
finishes and primers.
D.
Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1.
2.8
Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
PREPARATION
A.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Manual"
applicable to substrates indicated.
B.
Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and
are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.
1.
C.
Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease,
and incompatible paints and encapsulants.
1.
2.9
After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall
items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.
Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie
coat as required to produce paint systems indicated.
APPLICATION
A.
Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color
breaks.
INTERIOR PAINTING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
099123 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.10
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and
leave in an undamaged condition.
B.
At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or
defaced painted surfaces.
2.11
A.
INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE
Steel Substrates:
1.
Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: (PAINT TYPE #1)
a.
b.
c.
B.
CMU Substrates:
1.
Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: (PAINT TYPE #2)
a.
b.
c.
C.
Block Filler: Block filler, latex, interior/exterior, MPI #4.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.
Topcoat:
Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, eggshell (Gloss
Level 3), MPI #145.
Wood Substrates: Including doors at new donor booths, see drawings for locations.
1.
Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: (PAINT TYPE #3)
a.
b.
c.
D.
Prime Coat: Primer, rust-inhibitive, water based MPI #107.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.
Topcoat:
Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss
Level 5), MPI #147.
Prime Coat: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.
Topcoat:
Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, semi-gloss (Gloss
Level 5), MPI #147.
Gypsum Board Substrates:
1.
Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System: (PAINT TYPE #4 & #5)
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, matching topcoat.
Topcoat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143.
(#4)
Topcoat:
Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, eggshell (Gloss
Level 3), MPI #145. (#5)
High-Performance Architectural Latex System: (PAINT TYPE #6)
a.
b.
Prime Coat: Primer sealer, latex, interior, MPI #50.
Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching
topcoat.
INTERIOR PAINTING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
099123 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
c.
Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (Gloss
Level 5), MPI #141.
END OF SECTION 099123
INTERIOR PAINTING
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
099123 - 5
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 102113 - TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes plastic-laminate units as follows:
1.
1.2
Toilet Enclosures: Floor Mounted & Overhead braced.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
1.3
Show locations of cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with requirements in CID-A-A-60003, "Partitions, Toilets, Complete."
B.
Accessibility Requirements:
ICC A117.1.
1.4
In addition to local governing regulations, comply with ANSI /
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other construction
contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PLASTIC LAMINATE UNITS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: The design for toilet partitions is based on Designer Series 1040, by
Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the
named product or a comparable product and color by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Accurate Partitions Corporation.
Ampco.
Sanymetal; a Crane Plumbing company.
Door, Panel and Pilaster Construction: 0.050-inch thick plastic-laminate facing sheets are
pressure laminated to core material without splices or joints in facings or cores. Laminate is
applied to edges before broad surfaces to seal edges and prevent laminate from being pried
loose. Exposed core material is sealed at cutouts to protect core from moisture.
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
102113 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
Core Material: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 particleboard with 45-lb density.
Doors and Panels: Finished to not less than nominal 1 inch thick.
Pilasters: Provide construction to comply with the following:
a.
Finished to not less than 1 inch thick and with internal, nominal 0.120-inch- thick,
steel-sheet reinforcement.
C.
Pilaster Shoes: Stainless steel, ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304, 3 inches high.
D.
Full-Height (Continuous) Brackets: Manufacturer's standard design; stainless steel.
2.2
ACCESSORIES
A.
Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware
and accessories.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Material: Stainless steel.
Hinges: Manufacturer's standard continuous, cam type that swings to a closed or
partially open position. Hinges shall be attached to door and stile by theft-resistant, oneway stainless steel machine screws into factory-installed metal inserts. Fasteners
secured directly into the core are not acceptable. Cam shall be adjustable in the field to
permit door to be fully closed or partially open when compartment is unoccupied.
Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit designed for
emergency access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide
units that comply with regulatory requirements for accessibility at compartments
designated as accessible. Sliding door latch to require less than 5-lb force to operate.
Twisting latch operation is not acceptable.
Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized
to prevent in-swinging door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.
Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumper at out-swinging doors.
Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit at out-swinging doors that complies with
regulatory requirements for accessibility. Provide units on both sides of doors at
compartments designated as accessible.
B.
Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail with
antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.
C.
Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or
chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistant-type heads.
Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip
galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.
2.3
FABRICATION
A.
Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports, leveling
mechanism, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Provide shoes at pilasters to
conceal supports and leveling mechanism.
B.
Door Size and Swings: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide, in-swinging doors for
standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide, out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inchwide, clear opening for compartments designated as accessible.
C.
Dimensions: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
102113 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
1.
2.
3.
Dividing Panels: 58 inches high, mounted at 12 inches above finished floor.
Doors: 58 inches, mounted at 12 inches above finished floor.
Pilasters: 84 inches high, mounted with one-way theft-proof, stainless steel sex bolts.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight,
level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring
devices.
1.
Maximum Clearances:
a.
b.
B.
3.2
Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch.
Panels and Walls: 1 inch.
Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure
continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang doors to align tops
of doors with tops of panels and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when
doors are in closed position.
ADJUSTING
A.
Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written
instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors open
approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges on out-swinging
doors to return doors to fully closed position.
END OF SECTION 102113
TOILET COMPARTMENTS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
102113 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 102600 – WALL PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
1.2
1.3
SECTION INCLUDES
A.
Surface-mounted corner guards.
B.
Wall Guards.
C.
Protective Wall Covering.
D.
Handrails.
E.
Mounting hardware, accessories, and trim.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Manufacturer's complete and current product data for each product
required, including:
1.
Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2.
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3.
Complete installation methods.
B.
Provide test reports showing compliance with the performance specified for:
1.
Fire-related properties.
2.
Accessibility and safety properties.
3.
Impact strength.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to
repair or replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1
2.2
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable Manufacturer: InPro Corporation, which is located at: S80 W18766 Apollo
Dr. ; Muskego, WI 53150; Toll Free Tel: 800-222-5556; Tel: 262-679-9010; Email:
request info ([email protected]); Web: www.inprocorp.com
B.
Other manufactures of equivalent products as approved by Architect.
MATERIALS
A.
Vinyl: Fire retardant, high impact polyvinyl chloride (PVC), with an embossed
pebbled finish.
1.
Minimum Thickness: 0.080 inch (2.0 mm).
2.
Vinyl Properties:
a.
Surface burning characteristics, tested in accordance with ASTM E 84:
WALL PROTECTION
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
102600 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.3
SPECIALTY SURFACE MOUNTED CORNER GUARDS
A.
2.4
Textured Tape-On Vinyl: 0.080-inch (2.0 mm) thick, pebble-textured rigid vinyl for
installation by adhesive or double faced tape.
1.
Style: As shown on drawings
2.
Color: As shown on drawings
WALL GUARD SYSTEM
A.
G1600 Wall Guard, 6" (152mm) height x 1" (25mm) depth.
B.
Materials
1.
Polycarbonate/acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (PC/ABS): Snap on cover of
.080" (2mm) thickness shall be extruded from chemical and stain resistant
PC/ABS. Inner snap-on impact bumper of .070" (1.8mm) thickness shall be
extruded from chemical and stain resistant PC/ABS.
2.
Aluminum: Continuous aluminum retainer of .080" (2mm) thickness shall be
fabricated from 6063-T5 aluminum, with a mill finish
C.
Components
1.
End caps, inside corners and outside corners shall be made of injection
molded thermoplastics.
2.
Fasteners: All mounting system accessories appropriate for substrates
indicated on the drawings shall be provided.
D.
2.5
Flame spread 10, smoke developed 350-450; maximum.
Surface burning characteristics, tested in accordance with CAN/ULC
S102.2:
Flame spread 15, smoke developed 35; maximum.
Self-extinguishing characteristics: CC1 classification, per ASTM D 635.
Impact strength, tested in accordance with ASTM D 256: 30.2 ft lb/inch
(5285 N/m) of notch, minimum.
Chemical and stain resistant, as tested in accordance with ASTM D 543.
Fungus and bacteria resistant, as tested in accordance with ASTM G 21
and ASTM G 22.
Color consistency match when tested in accordance with SAE J-1545:
Accurate to within 1.0 or less Delta E by CIE LAB 10 degree standard
observer color difference and equation.
Finishes
1.
Covers: Colors of the wall guard to be selected by the architect from the InPro
EnviroGT finish selection. Surface shall have a pebblette texture.
2.
Vinyl color: As shown on drawings
3.
Inner Impact Bumper: Color of the inner impact bumper to be black.
4.
Molded Components: End caps, inside corners and outside corners shall be of a
color matching the wall guards. Surface shall have a pebblette texture.
PROTECTIVE WALL COVERING
A.
Wall Covering: IPC rigid poly vinyl chloride sheet
1.
Texture: Hair cell pattern.
2.
Surface Burning Characteristics: Provide UL Classified IPC Rigid Vinyl Sheet
conforming with the NFPA Class A fire rating. Surface burning characteristics
as determined by UL-723 (ASTM E-84), for IPC Rigid Vinyl Sheet installed with
3M Fastbond 30, InPro Bond Adhesive, or Formulated Solutions, LLC XT-
WALL PROTECTION
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
102600 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
2.6
2000+ inch Adhesive shall be a maximum flame spread of 20 and a maximum
smoke developed of 350 for .060 inch (1.5mm) thick material. Provide ULC
(Canada) listed IPC Rigid Vinyl Sheet conforming to the requirements of the
National Building Code of Canada 1990, Subsection 3.1.13. Surface burning
characteristics, as determined by CAN/ULC-S102.2, shall be flame spread of
15 and smoke developed of 30.
Self Extinguishing: Provide rigid vinyl sheet with a CC1 classification, as tested
in accordance with the procedures specified in ASTM D-635-74, Standard Test
Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of
Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position, as referenced in UBC
52-4-1988.
Provide sheet materials that have been tested and results filed in compliance
with article 15, part 1120 of the New York State uniform fire prevention and
building code. DOS # 09960-930504-4001.
Impact Strength: Provide IPC Rigid Vinyl Sheet that has an Impact Strength of
30.4 ft-lbs/ inch of thickness as tested in accordance with the procedures
specified in ASTM D-256-90b, Impact Resistance of Plastics.
Chemical and Stain Resistance: Provide rigid vinyl sheet that show resistance
to stain when tested in accordance with applicable provisions of ASTM D-543.
Fungal and Bacterial Resistance: Provide rigid vinyl that does not support
fungal or bacterial growth as tested in accordance with ASTM G-21 and ASTM
G-22.
Sheet Size: 48 inches x 120 inches or as required to make best use of product
of areas shown on drawings.
Thickness: .040 inches (1mm).
Color: As shown on drawings
B.
Trim: Provide trim components in the same color matching the wall covering, for use
with .040 inch (1mm) thick sheet.
1.
Top Caps.
2.
Vertical divider bars.
3.
Inside corners.
4.
Outside corner.
5.
Color matched caulk.
C.
Adhesives: As recommended by manufacturer of rigid vinyl sheet.
HANDRAILS
A.
4000 Handrail:
1.
B.
1 1/2" (38mm) x 2" (51 mm) gripping surface, extends 3 1/4" (89 mm) from wall.
Materials:
1.
Vinyl: Snap-on covers of .080" (2mm) thickness shall be extruded from
chemical and stain resistant polyvinyl chloride with the addition of impact
modifiers. No plasticizers shall be added (plasticizers may aid in bacterial
growth).
2.
Aluminum: Continuous aluminum retainer of .080" (2mm) thickness shall be
fabricated from 6063-TS aluminum with a mill finish.
3.
Stainless Steel: Stainless Steel Brackets shall be made o9f type 201SS with
WALL PROTECTION
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
102600 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
type 304 stainless steel flange cover.
C.
D.
2.7
1.
Returns, inside corners, outside corners and brackets shall be made of
injection molded thermoplastics.
2.
Fasteners: All mounting system accessories appropriate for substrates
indicated on the drawing shall be provided unless installer supplied is
indicated.
Finishes:
1.
Vinyl covers, inside corners, outside corners, returns and brackets: color as
indicated on drawings.
2.
Stainless Steel: Stainless steel brackets shall have a satin finish.
HEIGHTS
A.
2.8
Components:
Heights: Provide corner guards in heights as follows:
1.
As indicated on the drawings.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Provide appropriate fasteners and accessories as required to properly complete
installation.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.
INSTALLATION
A.
3.4
Verify that walls are in proper condition to receive installation of products.
General: Install products level and plumb, in full compliance with manufacturer's
installation instructions.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Verify that products are plumb and rigidly secured to substrate; make any adjustments
required.
B.
Clean products and immediate areas of installation, using materials and methods
recommended by manufacturer. Remove from project site packaging and debris
caused by installation.
END OF SECTION 102600
WALL PROTECTION
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
102600 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 102800 – TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
1.2
Toilet accessories.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
1.3
Construction details and dimensions.
Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work
and substrate preparation.
Material and finish descriptions.
Features that will be included for Project.
Manufacturer's warranty.
Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each
accessory required.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.4
Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products
of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required
for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation,
cleaning, and servicing of accessories.
B.
Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent
delaying the Work.
1.5
WARRANTY
A.
Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace
mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship
within specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.
TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
102800 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Nickel Coating: ASTM B 151/B 151M, Alloy UNS No. C74500 or No. C77600.
C.
Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamperand-theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.
D.
Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.
2.2
BATHROOM ACCESSORIES
A.
2.3
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide items indicated for each
designation in the Toilet Accessory Schedule on the Drawings.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors
and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage
and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.
B.
Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying.
Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate
to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.
B.
Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to
method in ASTM F 446.
3.2
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.
B.
Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.
C.
Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
END OF SECTION 102800
TOILET, BATH AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
102800 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 104413 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.2
Portable fire extinguishers.
Fire-protection cabinets for portable fire extinguishers.
Fire-extinguisher mounting brackets.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection cabinets and mounting brackets.
1.
2.
1.3
Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification.
Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting
methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware,
cabinet type, trim style, and panel style
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain fire extinguishers and fire-protection cabinets through one source
from a single manufacturer.
B.
NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable
Fire Extinguishers."
C.
Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers
indicated are accommodated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
JL Industries, Inc.
Kidde Residential and Commercial Division.
Larsen's Manufacturing Company.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
104413 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
4.
5.
2.2
Potter Roemer; LLC.
American Specialties, Inc.
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.
B.
Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick,
Class 1 (clear).
2.3
PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A.
General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet
indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
2.4
Valves: Nickel-plated polished brass body.
Handles and Levers: Stainless steel.
Instruction Labels:
Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,
Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections,
maintenance, and recharging.
Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 2-A:10-B:C, 10-lb nominal
capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.
FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET
A.
Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher; nonrated.
B.
Cabinet Material: Steel.
C.
Cabinet Construction: Nonrated.
D.
Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of shallow depth to suit style of
trim indicated, with maximum 4-inch projection.
E.
Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame.
F.
Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).
G.
Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.
1.
2.
H.
Provide projecting lever handle with cam-action latch.
Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open
180 degrees.
Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.
1.
Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
104413 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
I.
2.5
Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall
or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with
baked-enamel finish.
FABRICATION
A.
Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and
hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.
1.
B.
Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials
indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.
1.
2.
C.
2.6
Weld joints and grind smooth.
Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2
inch thick.
Miter and weld perimeter door frames.
Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground
smooth.
STEEL FINISHES
A.
Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying
with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning" or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling". After
cleaning, apply a conversion coating suited to the organic coating to be applied over it.
B.
Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply
manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting
topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to
achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.
1.
Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed
cabinets will be installed.
B.
Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare recesses for fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim
style.
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
104413 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install fire-protection specialties in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if
not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
B.
Fire-Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet or 48 inches to
the handle of the fire extinguisher.
Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.
Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
1.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire protection cabinets. If wall thickness is
not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire protection cabinets, as
indicated.
C.
Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations
indicated.
D.
Identification: Apply decals or vinyl lettering at locations indicated.
3.4
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection specialties
are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.
B.
Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking
devices operate properly.
C.
On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as
recommended by manufacturer.
D.
Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factoryfinished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fireprotection cabinet manufacturer.
E.
Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.
END OF SECTION 104413
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
104413 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 105113 - METAL LOCKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes the following:
1.
Knocked-down, standard metal lockers.
2.
Padlocks
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal locker.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
Show accessories.
Include locker identification system.
C.
Color Selection: Include standard range of manufacturers paint colors for selection.
D.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications:
An authorized representative of metal locker manufacturer for
installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain metal lockers and accessories through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of metal
lockers and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product
Requirements."
1.
D.
Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory
data to Architect for review.
Regulatory Requirements: Where metal lockers are indicated to comply with accessibility
requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's
METAL LOCKERS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
105113 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
"Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities
(ADAAG)."
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Do not deliver metal lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for metal
locker installation.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Field Measurements: Verify the following by field measurements before fabrication and indicate
measurements on Shop Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
1.7
Concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support metal lockers before they
are enclosed.
Recessed openings.
Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying
the Work, establish recessed opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal
lockers without field measurements. Coordinate wall and floor construction to ensure that
actual recessed opening dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of concrete bases for metal lockers.
B.
Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that metal lockers can be supported and
installed as indicated.
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace components of metal lockers that fail in materials or workmanship, excluding finish,
within specified warranty period.
1.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a.
b.
2.
3.
Structural failures.
Faulty operation of latches and other door hardware.
Damage from deliberate destruction and vandalism is excluded.
Warranty Period for Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Two years from date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS) Type B, suitable for exposed
applications.
METAL LOCKERS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
105113 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
B.
Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type exposed bolt heads, and self-locking nuts
or lock washers for nuts on moving parts.
C.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for secure anchorage to each
substrate.
1.
2.
2.2
Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts.
Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
KNOCKED-DOWN, STANDARD METAL LOCKERS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Lyons.
2.
Republic Storage Systems Company.
B.
Locker Arrangement: Double tier.
C.
Size: 12 inches wide by 12 inches deep by 72 inches high (each tier 36 inches).
D.
Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.
E.
Body:
Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together.
unperforated, cold-rolled steel sheet with thicknesses as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Fabricate from
Tops, Bottoms, and Intermediate Dividers: 0.0209 inch, with single bend at sides.
Backs and Sides: 0.0209 inch thick, with full-height, double-flanged connections.
Shelves: 0.0209 inch thick, with double bend at front and single bend at sides and back.
F.
Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.0528-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; lapped
and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded into vertical
main frames. Form continuous, integral door strike full height on vertical main frames.
G.
Doors: One-piece; fabricated from 0.0528-inch-thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; formed into
channel shape with double bend at vertical edges, and with right-angle single bend at horizontal
edges.
1.
2.
3.
Doors less than 12 inches wide may be fabricated from 0.0428-inch-thick, cold-rolled
steel sheet.
Stiffeners: Manufacturer's standard full-height stiffener fabricated from 0.0428-inchthick, cold-rolled steel sheet; welded to inner face of doors.
Door Style: Vented panel as follows:
a.
H.
Hinges: Self-closing; welded to door and attached to door frame with not less than 2 factoryinstalled rivets per hinge that are completely concealed and tamper resistant when door is
closed; fabricated to swing 180 degrees.
1.
I.
Louvered Vents: Not less than four louver openings at top for box lockers.
Hinges: Manufacturer's standard, steel continuous or knuckle type.
Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless-steel cup with integral door pull, recessed so
locking device does not protrude beyond face of door; pry resistant.
1.
Multipoint Latching: Finger-lift latch control designed for use with built-in combination
locks, built-in key locks, or padlocks; positive automatic and prelocking.
METAL LOCKERS
105113 - 3
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
4/9/14
2001-1112.92
Novus Architects, Inc.
J.
Combination Padlocks:
master key override.
K.
Equipment: Equip each metal locker with identification plate and the following, unless otherwise
indicated:
1.
L.
2.
Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, manufacturer's
standard thickness, but not less than 0.0329 inch thick.
Continuous Base: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, manufacturer's standard
thickness, but not less than 0.0528 inch thick.
Finish: Powder coat.
1.
2.3
Double-Tier Units: One double-prong ceiling hook and two single-prong wall hooks.
Accessories:
1.
M.
Provide one for each, Masterlock No. 1525 Combination lock with
Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.
FABRICATION
A.
General: Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, and without warp; with metal faces flat and free
of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges free of sharp edges and burrs, and safe to
touch.
1.
2.
Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet, unless
otherwise indicated.
Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for a complete
installation.
B.
Knocked-Down Construction: Fabricate metal lockers for nominal assembly at Project site
using nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets. Factory weld frame members together to form a rigid, onepiece assembly.
C.
Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard etched, embossed, or stamped aluminum plates;
with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch high. Start numbering with number one (1).
D.
Continuous Base: Formed into channel or Z profile for stiffness, and fabricated in lengths as
long as practicable to enclose base and base ends of metal lockers; finished to match lockers.
E.
Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths as long as practicable, without visible fasteners
at splice locations; finished to match lockers.
2.4
STEEL SHEET FINISHES
A.
General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products"
for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Factory finish steel surfaces and accessories except stainless-steel and chrome-plated
surfaces.
C.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other contaminants
that could impair paint bond. Use manufacturer's standard methods.
METAL LOCKERS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
105113 - 4
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
D.
Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply
manufacturer's standard baked-polymer thermosetting powder finish. Comply with resin
manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.
1.
2.
Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but not more
than 36 inches o.c. Install anchors through backup reinforcing plates, channels, or
blocking as required to prevent metal distortion, using concealed fasteners.
Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top and bottom of lockers.
B.
Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Assemble knocked-down metal lockers with standard fasteners,
with no exposed fasteners on door faces or face frames.
C.
Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures accurately
together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice plates.
1.
2.
Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners.
Identification Plates: Identify metal lockers with identification as designated by Owner.
a.
3.
3.3
Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two aluminum
rivets.
Attach sloping top units to metal lockers, with closures at exposed ends.
ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION
A.
Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily without
binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.
B.
Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit metal locker
use during construction.
C.
Touch up marred finishes, or replace metal lockers that cannot be restored to factory-finished
appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by metal locker
manufacturer.
END OF SECTION 105113
METAL LOCKERS
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
105113 - 5
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 113100 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Refrigerator/freezers.
Microwave ovens.
Dishwasher.
Disposal.
SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include operating characteristics,
dimensions of individual appliances, and finishes for each appliance.
B.
Appliance Schedule: For appliances; use same designations indicated on Drawings.
C.
Maintenance Data: For each product to include in maintenance manuals.
D.
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer for
installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer. Maintain, within 100 miles of Project
site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain residential appliances through one source.
1.
2.
D.
Provide products from same manufacturer for each type of appliance required.
To the greatest extent possible, provide appliances by a single manufacturer for entire
Project.
Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for
product's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they
relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics
are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction
testing, field testing, and in-service performance.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
113100 - 1
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
E.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following product certifications:
1.
2.
F.
Energy Ratings: Provide residential appliances that carry labels indicating energy-cost analysis
(estimated annual operating costs) and efficiency information as required by the FTC Appliance
Labeling Rule.
1.
1.5
NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked
for intended use.
UL and NEMA: Provide electrical components required as part of residential appliances
that are listed and labeled by UL and that comply with applicable NEMA standards.
Provide appliances that qualify for the EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling
program.
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or
replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
B.
Microwave Oven: Limited warranty including parts and labor for first year and parts thereafter
for on-site service on the magnetron tube.
1.
C.
Refrigerator/Freezer, Sealed System: Limited warranty including parts and labor for first year
and parts thereafter for on-site service on the product.
1.
D.
Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
Dishwasher: Limited warranty including parts and labor for first year and parts thereafter for onsite service on the product.
1.
2.
3.
E.
Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period for Deterioration of Tub and Metal Door Liner: 10 years from date of
Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period for Water Distribution System: Two years from date of Substantial
Completion.
Warranty Period for Other Components: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
Disposer: Limited warranty including parts and labor for first year.
1.
Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
APPLIANCES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
See Equipment Plans / Schedule.
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
113100 - 2
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
2.2
FINISHES, GENERAL
A.
Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B.
Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,
temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.
B.
Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before
equipment installation.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A.
General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with concealed
fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are
completely concealed.
C.
Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in
each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.
D.
Utilities: Refer to Divisions 22 and 26 for plumbing and electrical requirements.
3.3
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
Test each item of residential appliances to verify proper operation.
adjustments.
B.
Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed.
C.
Remove packing material from residential appliances and leave units in clean condition, ready
for operation.
3.4
Make necessary
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain residential appliances.
END OF SECTION 113100
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
113100 - 3
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
SECTION 133125 - PREFABRICATED METAL BUILDINGS (BIOHAZARD SHEDS)
PART ! - GENERAL
1.1
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS – these are minimum requirements – provide additional if required by
local jurisdiction.
A.
Provide factory built prefabricated structures capable of withstanding the effects of gravity
loads and the following loads according to applicable building codes for local requirements:
1.
Wind loads.
2.
Snow loads.
3.
Seismic loads.
B.
Thermal Movements:
material surfaces.
Temperature Change (Range):
120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F,
F.
Cooperate with regulatory agency or authority and provide data as requested by authority
having jurisdiction
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
C.
2.2
Acceptable Manufacturers:
1.
Austin Mohawk and Company, Inc.
2.
Modular Design Technology.
3.
Mobile Mini, Inc.
PREFABRICATED STEEL BUILDINGS
D.
Size: See drawings
E.
Height: Nominal outside height 96 inches. Interior floor to ceiling height 88 inches.
F.
Prefabricated with 14 gauge mechanical tube, welded framing system. Exterior smooth and
flat with no exposed fasteners on building exterior.
G.
Frame Construction: Framing shall be 14 gauge or heavier mechanical tube. All joints shall
be MIG welded.
H.
Base/Floor: Finished floor of nonskid aluminum tread plate. Floor is mounted to 2 inch to 4
inch tube/channel steel base frame.
I.
Wall Panel: Exterior face of manufacturer’s standard 16 gauge galvanized steel, an E.P.S.
insulation core and a 16 gauge galvanized steel interior face. Panels shall be MIG welded
into place.
1.
Overall thickness: 2 inches R-10
2.
Finish: Interior and exterior panel faces shall have a manufacturer's epoxy primer with
a urethane finish
J.
Interior Ceiling Panels: Prefinished steel, 24 gauge painted white with expanded polystyrene
core providing a smooth flat interior.
K.
Roof: Galvanized steel, 20 to 24 gauge, G-60 zinc coating, interlocking pan sections, 3
inches high varying widths and capable of supporting a minimum 40 psf live load. Roof
PREFABRICATED METAL BUILDINGS (BIOHAZARD SHEDS)
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
133125
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.
drains into full perimeter gutter system.
1.2
L.
Swinging Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick, tubular-frame design.
1.
Commercial Grade Steel Swing Door 36 inches by 80 inches. No Glass.
2.
Hardware set to contain - Storage room lockset, weather strip, rain hood, threshold
and door sweep.
M.
Vent:
1.
Provide a 12”x12” wall vent.
FABRICATION
A.
Fabricate factory built, prefabricated structures and shelters completely in factory.
B.
Fabricate factory built, prefabricated structures for forklift unloading under base of booth with
forklift pockets in base of booth or welded in place concealed lifting lugs at roof that are
suitable for placement of the structure on prepared foundations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
C.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
D.
Place on suitable concrete foundations, slab or asphalt.
E.
Anchor securely in place, allowing for required movement, including expansion and
contraction.
END OF SECTION 13125
PREFABRICATED METAL BUILDINGS (BIOHAZARD SHEDS)
CSL Plasma New Center, Gilbert, AZ.
2001-1112.92
133125
4/9/14
Novus Architects, Inc.